Index It Fi Igreddy

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 544

SAP FI/CO FI Material

Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

-1-

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

ERP stands for Enterprise Resource Planning. ERP is a way to integrate the data and processes of
an organization into one single system. Usually ERP systems will have many components
including hardware and software, in order to achieve integration, most ERP systems use a unified
database to store data for various functions found throughout the organization. The ERP solutions
seek to streamline and integrate operation processes and information flows in the company to
synergies the resources of an organization namely men, material, money and machine through
information. Initially implementation of an ERP package was possible only for very large Multi
National Companies and Infrastructure Companies due to high cost involved.
Integration is an extremely important part to ERP's. ERP's main goal is to integrate data and
processes from all areas of an organization and unify it for easy access and work flow. ERP's
usually accomplish integration by creating one single database that employs multiple software
modules providing different areas of an organization with various business functions.
Components of ERP
To enable the easy handling of the system the ERP has been divided into the following Core
subsystems:

Sales and Marketing

Master Scheduling

Material Requirement Planning

Capacity Requirement Planning

Bill of Materials

Purchasing

Shop floor control

Accounts Payable/Receivable

Logistics

Asset Management

Financial Accounting

An ideal ERP system is when a single database is utilized and contains all data for various software
modules. These software modules can include:
Manufacturing: Some of the functions include; engineering, capacity, workflow management,
quality control, bills of material, manufacturing process, etc.
Financials: Accounts payable, accounts receivable, fixed assets, general ledger and cash
management, etc.
Human Resources: Benefits, training, payroll, time and attendance, etc
Supply Chain Management: Inventory, supply chain planning, supplier scheduling, claim
processing, order entry, purchasing, etc.
-2-

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Projects: Costing, billing, activity management, time and expense, etc.


Customer Relationship Management: sales and marketing, service, commissions, customer
contact, calls center support, etc.
Data Warehouse: Usually this is a module that can be accessed by an organizations customers,
suppliers and employees.
Features of ERP
Some of the major features of ERP and what ERP can do for the business system are as below:

ERP facilitates company-wide Integrated Information System covering all functional areas
like Manufacturing, Selling and distribution, Payables, Receivables, Inventory, Accounts,
Human resources, Purchases etc.,
ERP performs core corporate activities and increases customer service and thereby
augmenting the Corporate Image.
ERP bridges the information gap across the organization.
ERP provides for complete integration of Systems not only across the departments in a
company but also across the companies under the same management.
ERP is the only solution for better Project Management.
ERP allows automatic introduction of latest technologies like Electronic Fund Transfer
(EFT), Electronic Data Interchange (EDI), Internet, Intranet, Video conferencing, ECommerce etc.
ERP eliminates the most of the business problems like Material shortages, Productivity
enhancements, Customer service, Cash Management, Inventory problems, Quality
problems, Prompt delivery etc.,
ERP not only addresses the current requirements of the company but also provides the
opportunity of continually improving and refining business processes.
ERP provides business intelligence tools like Decision Support Systems (DSS), Executive
Information System (EIS), Reporting, Data Mining and Early Warning Systems (Robots)
for enabling people to make better decisions and thus improve their business processes

Benefits of ERP
The benefits accruing to any business enterprise on account of implementing are unlimited.
According to the companies like NIKE, DHL, Tektronix, Fujitsu, Millipore, Sun Microsystems,
following are some of the benefits they achieved by implementing ERP packages:

Gives Accounts Payable personnel increased control of invoicing and payment processing
and thereby boosting their productivity and eliminating their reliance on computer
personnel for these operations.
Reduce paper documents by providing on-line formats for quickly entering and retrieving
information.
Improves timeliness of information by permitting, posting daily instead of monthly.
Greater accuracy of information with detailed content, better presentation, fully satisfactory
for the Auditors.
Improved Cost Control
Faster response and follow up on customers
More efficient cash collection, say, material reduction in delay in payments by customers.
Better monitoring and quicker resolution of queries.
-3-

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Enables quick response to change in business operations and market conditions.


Helps to achieve competitive advantage by improving its business process.
Improves supply-demand linkage with remote locations and branches in different countries.
Provides a unified customer database usable by all applications.
Improves International operations by supporting a variety of tax structures, invoicing
schemes, multiple currencies, multiple period accounting and languages.
Improves information access and management throughout the enterprise.
Provides solution for problems like Y2K and Single Monitory Unit (SMU) or Euro
Currency.

Implementation of ERP
Implementing an ERP package has to be done on a phased manner. Step by step method of
implementing will yield a better result than big-bang introduction. The total time required for
successfully implementing an ERP package will be anything between 18 and 24 months. The
normal steps involved in implementation of an ERP are as below:

Project Planning
Business & Operational analysis including Gap analysis
Business Process Reengineering
Installation and configuration
Project team training
Business Requirement mapping
Module configuration
System interfaces
Data conversion
Custom Documentation
End user training
Acceptance testing
Post implementation/Audit support

Suppliers of ERP
There are many numbers of ERP suppliers who are very active in the market. Some of the
companies offering renowned international ERP products include:

Baan
CODA
D&B
IBM
JD Edwards
Marcarn
Oracle
Peoplesoft
Platinum
Ramco
SAP
SMI
Software 2000

-4-

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

-5-

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

About SAP
In 1972, five former IBM employees -- Dietmar Hopp, Hans-Werner Hector, Hasso Plattner,
Klaus Tschira, and Claus Wellenreuther -- launch a company called Systems, Applications,
and Products in Data Processing in Mannheim, Germany. Their vision: to develop standard
application software for real-time business processing.
The original name for SAP was German: Systeme, Anwendungen, Produkte, and German for
"Systems Applications and Products." The original SAP idea was to provide customers with the
ability to interact with a common corporate database for a comprehensive range of applications.
Gradually, the applications have been assembled and today many corporations, including IBM and
Microsoft, are using SAP products to run their own businesses.
SAP applications, built around their latest R/3 system, provide the capability to manage financial,
asset, and cost accounting, production operations and materials, personnel, plants, and archived
documents. The R/3 system runs on a number of platforms including Windows 2000 and uses the
client/server model. The latest version of R/3 includes a comprehensive Internet-enabled package.
The 1980s: Rapid Growth
SAP moves into the company's first building on Max-Planck-Strasse in an industrial park in
Walldorf, near Heidelberg. Our software development area and its 50 terminals are all now under
one roof. Fifty of the 100 largest German industrial firms are already SAP customers.
The SAP R/2 system attains the high level of stability of the previous generation of programs.
Keeping in mind its multinational customers, SAP designs SAP R/2 to handle different languages
and currencies. With this and other innovations in SAP R/2, SAP sees rapid growth.
By the middle of the decade, SAP founds its first sales organization outside Germany, in Austria.
The company makes its first appearance at the CeBIT computer fair in Hanover, Germany.
Revenues reach DM 100 million (around $52 million), earlier than expected.
In August 1988, SAP GmbH becomes SAP AG. Starting on November 4, 1.2 million shares are
listed on the Frankfurt and Stuttgart stock exchanges.
Germany's renowned business journal, manager magazine, names SAP its Company of the Year -a distinction we would receive twice more in the next few years.With the founding of subsidiaries
in Denmark, Sweden, Italy, and the United States, SAP's international expansion takes a leap
forward.
The 1990s: A New Approach to Software and Solutions
SAP R/3 is unleashed on the market. The client-server concept, uniform appearance of graphical
interfaces, consistent use of relational databases, and the ability to run on computers from different
vendors meets with overwhelming approval. With SAP R/3, SAP ushers in a new generation of
enterprise software -- from mainframe computing to the three-tier architecture of database,
application, and user interface. To this day, the client-server architecture is the standard in business
software.
A growing number of subsidiaries are managed out of Walldorf. The new Sales and Development
Center in Walldorf officially opens it doors. It symbolizes the global success of the company. In
-6-

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

our twentieth year, our business outside Germany exceeds 50 percent of total sales for the first
time. By 1996, the company has earned 1,089 new SAP R/3 customers. At the end of the year,
SAP R/3 has been installed in more than 9,000 systems worldwide.
SAP celebrates its twenty-fifth anniversary in 1997 and now employs approximately 12,900
people. We continue to strengthen our industry focus and build more and more industry-specific
solutions. Henning Kagermann becomes Co-Chairman and CEO of SAP AG with Hasso Plattner.
On August 3, 1998, the letters S-A-P appear for the first time on the Big Board at the New York
Stock Exchange (NYSE), the largest stock exchange in the world.
As the decade draws to a close, Hasso Plattner, Co-Founder, Co-Chairman, and CEO announces
the mySAP.com strategy, heralding the beginning of a new direction for the company and our
product portfolio. MySAP.com links e-commerce solutions to existing ERP applications, using
state-of-the-art Web technology.
The 2000s: Innovation for the New Millennium
With the Internet, the user becomes the focus of software applications. SAP develops SAP
Workplace and paves the way for the idea of an enterprise portal and role-specific access to
information.
Currently, more than 12 million users work each day with SAP solutions. There are now 121,000
installations worldwide, more than 1,500 SAP partners, over 25 industry-specific business
solutions, and more than 41,200 customers in 120 countries. SAP is the world's third-largest
independent software vendor.
SAP is categorized into 3 core functional areas:
Logistics

Sales and Distribution (SD)


Material Management (MM)
Warehouse Management (WM)
Production Planning (PP)
General Logistics (LO)
Quality Management (QM)

Financial

Financial Accounting (FI)


Controlling (CO)
Enterprise Controlling (EC)
Investment Management (IM)
Treasury (TR)

Human Resources

Personnel Administration (PA)


Personnel Development (PD)
-7-

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

-8-

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

System Landscape
Landscape is like a server system or like a layout of the servers or some may even call it the
architecture of the servers viz. SAP is divided into three different landscapes:

DEV (DEVELOPMENT SERVER)


QAS (QUALITY SERVER)
PROD (PRODUCTION SERVER)

- DEV would have multiple clients for ex: 100- Sandbox, 110- Golden, and 120- Unit Test.
- QAS may again have multiple clients for ex: 200- Integration Test, 210 to 220 Training.
- PRD may have something like a 300 Production.
These names and numbers are the implementer's discreet on how they want it or they have been
using in their previous implementations or how are the client's business scenario.
Now whatever you do in the Sandbox doesn't affect the other servers or clients. Whenever you
think you are satisfied with your configuration and you think you can use it moving forward, you
RE-DO it in the golden client (remember, this is a very neat and clean client and you cannot use it
for rough usage). As you re-do everything that you had thought was important and usable, you get
a transport request pop up upon saving every time. You save it under a transport request and give
your description to it. Thus the configuration is transported to the Unit Test client (120 in this
example).
You don't run any transaction or even use the SAP Easy Access screen on the 110 (golden) clients.
This is a configuration only client. Now upon a successful transport by the Basis guy, you have the
entire configuration in the Testing client, just as it is in the Golden client. The configuration
remains in sync between these two clients.
But in the Testing client, you cannot even access SPRO (Display IMG) screen. It's a transaction
only client where you perform the unit test. Upon a satisfactory unit test, you move the good
configuration to the next SERVER (DEV). The incorrect or unsatisfactory configuration is
corrected in Golden (may again as well be practiced in the sandbox prior to Golden) and
accordingly transported back to 120 (Unit Test) until the unit test affected by that particular
configuration is satisfactory.
The Golden client remains the 'database' (if you want to call it that) or you may rather call it the
'ultimate' reference client for the entire good, complete and final configuration that is being used in
the implementation.
In summary:
Landscape: is the arrangement for the servers
IDES: is purely for education purpose and is NOT INCLUDED in the landscape.
DEVELOPMENT ---> QUALITY ----> PRODUCTION

-9-

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

DEVELOPMENT: is where the consultants do the customization as per the company's


requirement.
QUALITY: is where the core team members and other members test the customization.
PRODUCTION: is where the live data of the company is recorded.
A request will flow from DEVQTYPRD and not backwards.
1. Sandbox server: In the initial stages of any implementation project, You are given a sandbox
server where you do all the configuration/customization as per the companys business process.
2. Development Server: - Once the BBP gets signed off, the configuration is done is development
server and saved in workbench requests, to be transported to Production server.
3. Production Server: This is the last/ most refined client where the user will work after project GO
LIVE. Any changes/ new development is done is development client and the request is transported
to production.
These three are landscape of any Company. They organized their office in these three ways.
Developers develop their program in Development server and then transport it to test server. In
testing server tester check/test the program and then transport it to Production Server. Later it will
deploy to client from production server.
Presentation Server - Where SAP GUI has.
Application Server - Where SAP Installed.
Database Server - Where Database installed.

System Landscape
DEV

QAS
Transport

Transport
Configuration

CUST

Write ABAP
Program

DEVL

Unit test

UTST

PRD

QTST
Quality Testing

TRAN
Training client

SAND

Common Shared Directory

- 10 -

PPRD
Pre Production

PROD
Production

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 11 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

What R/3 in SAP


What is the meaning of "R" in R/3 systems?
R/3 stands for real-time three tier architecture. This is the kind of architecture SAP R/3 system
has.
R/3 means three layers are installed in Different system/server and they are connected with each
other.
1) Presentation
2) Application
3) Database

SAP System Architecture


SAP GUI

Web Browser

DI AG

HTTP, HTTPS

SAP Web Application Server(SAP Instance)

SM TP, S OAP, X M L,

Dispatcher

SAP Web AS Java

Queue

Dispatcher Queue

ICM

SAP Buffer
(Shared Mem)

Memory Pipe

Oracle
Informix

Database Server

DB2
MS SQL Server
MAX DB

Before sap comes in to Three Tier Architecture it was in to One Tire and Tow Tire that as follow:

SAP System Configuration

One -tier
configuration

Two - tier
configuration

Three -tier
configuration

Presentation
Presentation processes

Application
Application processes

Database

Database , application ,
presentation processes

Database ,
application processes

- 12 -

Database
processes

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Types of Data in SAP

Data in SAP System


90 tables

User Master
configurations
xxxx tables

Customizing

1. Client-dependent Data
(Client-Specific)

Master
Application
xx,xxx tablesTransaction

Customizing
2. Client-independent Data
(Cross-Client)

e.g. printer

ABAP programs

Repository

- 13 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

LOGIN IN TO SAP
On the desk top, In the following screen:

This is GUI to login to SAP.


Double click on this

icon is GUI (Graphical User Interface) which help you to login to or to


In the screen is your desk top. This
enter into the SAP. When you double click on this it will display the following screen:
Select ECC 6.0 and
click on this button
(Log on)

In the above screen click on


below:

button which take you to login screen on sap as

- 14 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Enter your client Number


Enter your User Name
Enter your system Password

In the above screen enter Client Number, User Name , System Password and pres entr button so it
will take you to easy access screen as below:

Here, the SAP Easy Access initial screen shown below:

- 15 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

1) Screen Header: The screen header consists of:

Menu bar
Standard toolbar
Title bar
Application toolbar

2) Screen Banner (menu bar): In previous releases, the title bar and menu bar were at the top of
the R/3 window. As of Release 4.6, a screen banner replaces these two elements. The screen
banner consists of:
3) Menu bar: GUI interaction buttons
The Minimize, Maximize, and Close buttons are no longer in the top right-hand corner. They are
now slightly to the left, beside the SAP logo:

You can also find these GUI interaction options in the dropdown menu that appears when you
choose
in the top left-hand corner.
4) Screen Banner(standard tool bar): By default, the command field is closed. To display it,
choose the arrow to the left of the Save icon:
To hide it, choose the arrow to the

The command field appears:


right (outside) of the field.

To display a list of the transactions you used last, choose the dropdown arrow
end of the field.

at the right-hand

5) Title bar: The page title bar appears below the top-level navigation bar and relates to the
currently displayed portal page. It contains items pertinent to the runtime navigation of portal
pages, as well as items related to the identification, personalization, and handling of portal pages.
B&C. Menu bar and Standard Tool Bar functions
Main Menu Bar and Standard Toolbar
Use
You can call functions that relate to the whole system from the main menu bar and the standard
toolbar (at the top of the application window).
You call functions that relate to a particular object from the menu bar in the respective object
editor.

- 16 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Features
The following table lists all the functions that you can access from the various menus.
You can call the most important functions in the main menu bar directly from the standard toolbar
as well.

Function

Description

New

Calls the Create Object function

Open

Opens the object that is selected in the navigation tree

Copy Object

Copies the selected object

Delete

Deletes the selected object


Saves all entries in the opened editors

Save All
Close All

Closes all open editors

Search

Calls search help

Where-Used List

Calls the where-used list for the selected object

Exit

Closes the application

Function

Description

Send
Message ...

System Sends a system message to all users who are logged on.
You can classify the message as a warning or information
message.

Display System Displays system messages


Message
Personal Settings
User RoleOpen ( )
User RoleNew ( )

Calls the personal settings function


Calls the function for opening/creating user roles.

Tools Menu (Integration Repository)


Function

Description

Java Proxy Generation

Generates proxies in a software component version (see


Java Proxy Generation)

- 17 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Transfer from System Calls the function for importing software component
Landscape Directory versions
Import
Software
Component Versions
Transfer from System Calls the function for updating application components
Landscape Directory
Update Application
Components
Release-Transfer Wizard

Calls the release transfer function

Import Design Objects

Calls the function for importing design objects (see


Transporting XI Objects)

Export Design Objects

Calls the function for exporting design objects (see


Transporting XI Objects)

Find Transports

Calls the function for finding transports

Tools Menu (Integration Directory)


Function

Description

Transfer Calls the integration scenario configuration


Integration Scenario
from Repository
Configuration Calls the configuration wizard.
Wizard
Value Mapping

Calls the value mapping function

Create
Communication
Channels
Automatically

Calls the function for creating communication channels


automatically

Define Web Service

Calls the wizard for defining Web services.

Import Calls the function for importing configuration objects (see


Configuration Objects Exporting and Importing Integration Objects)
Export Calls the function for exporting configuration objects (see
Configuration Objects Exporting and Importing Integration Objects)
Environment Menu
Function

Description

Cache Notifications

Calls the cache notifications function

Delete
Cache

SLD

Data Calls the function to clear the SLD cache

Environment Tools Menu (Integration Repository)


Function

Description
- 18 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Integration
Builder Calls the Integration Builder (Integration Directory)
(Configuration)
Environment Tools Menu (Integration Directory)
Function
Integration
(Design)

Description
Builder Calls the Integration Builder (Integration Repository)

Help Menu
Function
Application Help

Description
Calls the Online Help for SAP Exchange Infrastructure from the
SAP Library

Legend

Calls the legend in which all the icons used on the user interface
are explained

Info

Calls a page containing information about the current session


(for example, user logged on, server used)

What is Client?
Definition
A commercially, organizationally, and technically self-contained unit within an SAP System.
Clients have their own master records and set of tables.
The definition of the client organizational unit is obligatory.
The client is the highest level in the SAP System hierarchy. Specifications that you make, or data
that you enter at this level are valid for all company codes and for all other organizational
structures. You therefore only need to make these specifications, or enter this data once. This
ensures that the data is consistent.
Users must enter a client key when they log on to the SAP System. This defines the client in which
they wish to work. All the entries you make are saved per client. Data processing and analysis is
also carried out per client.
This means that you cannot include customer accounts from different clients in one dunning run.
Access authorization is assigned per client. You must create a user master record for each user in
the client where he or she wishes to work.
The SAP System is delivered with the clients 000 and 001 - these clients already contain default
settings. For more information, see Setting Up Clients in Customizing. These sections are
automatically selected when you create your implementation projects (company IMG, project
IMG).

- 19 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 20 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE CONFIGURATION

Creating Top Company:


The smallest organizational unit for which individual financial statements are created according to
the relevant legal requirements. A company can include one or more company codes.
The definition of the company organizational unit is optional.
A companys financial statements also form the basis of consolidated financial statements.
All of the company codes within a company must use the same chart of accounts and fiscal year.
However, each company code can have a different local currency.

PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition->financial Accounting->Define Company.


Transaction Code: OX15
Database Table: T880
Click on IMG activity
following window.

and click on New Entries

in displayed window so it give

Give the required details as above screen shows. Now click save
button
to go back to SPRO screen.
When u click on save button the following window will display:

- 21 -

button and click on back

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Now just click clicks enter button or click on continue button.

Define Credit Control Area:

PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition->financial Accounting-> Define Credit Control


Area.
Transaction Code: OB54
Database Table: T014, T014T
Click on IMG activity
following window.

and click on New Entries

in displayed window so it gives

Give the required details as above screen shows. Now click save
button
to go back.

button and click on back

In the next screen just fill the Description against your credit control area which you created above
as follow.
Edit, Copy, Delete, Check Company Code
- 22 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

Now click save

I.G.REDDY

button and click on back button

to go back to SPRO screen.

Edit, Copy, Delete, Check Company Code:

Smallest organizational unit of external accounting for which a complete, self-contained set of
accounts can be created. This includes the entry of all transactions that must be posted and the
creation of all items for legal individual financial statements, such as the balance sheet and the
profit and loss statement.
The definition of the company code organizational unit is obligatory.
The company code is the central organizational unit of external accounting within the SAP System.
You must define at least one company code before implementing the Financial Accounting
component. The business transactions relevant for Financial Accounting are entered, saved, and
evaluated at company code level.
You usually create a legally independent company in the SAP System with one company code.
However, you can also define a company code according to other criteria. A company code could
also be a separate, but not independent, commercial place of work. This is necessary for example,
if the place of work is actually situated in a different country and evaluations therefore have to be
carried out in the appropriate national currency and in accordance with other tax and legal
specifications.
If you want to manage the accounting for several independent companies simultaneously, you can
set up several company codes in one client. You must set up at least one company code in each
client.
If you use other components of the SAP System, you have to make assignments between the
company code as the central organizational unit of Financial Accounting, and the organizational
units of the other components. This is necessary to ensure that data can be transferred between the
components.

- 23 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition->financial Accounting-> Edit, Copy, Delete,


Check Company Code.
Transaction Code: OX02
Database Table: T880
Click on IMG activity and display following window.

Now double click in Edit Company Code Data or select this line and click on chose
button
, so it will take to another window now click on New Entries
displayed window so it gives following window.

Now click save

button so it will address window as follow:

- 24 -

in

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Once you filled all above required just click on continue button
and to go back click on back button to go back to SPRO screen.

so it will save all the settings

Define Business Area:


Organizational unit of external accounting that corresponds to a specific business segment or area
of responsibility in a company. Movements in value entered in Financial Accounting are assigned
to business areas.
Financial statements can be created for business areas for internal purposes.
The definition of the business area organizational unit is optional.
Business areas are used in external segment reporting (over and above company codes), based on
the significant areas of operation of a company (for example, product lines, branches).
To post items in a business area, enter the business area when you enter the business transaction.
However, the business area can also be derived from other account assignments, such as the cost
center. To enable the system to do this, you must define the business area in the cost center master
record.
PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition->financial Accounting->Define Business Area.
Transaction Code: OX02
Database Table: TGSB, TGSBT

- 25 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Click on IMG activity
following window.

I.G.REDDY

and click on New Entries

in displayed window so it give

Like above any number of business areas you can create.


Now click save

button and click on back button

to go back to SPRO screen.

Define Functional Area:


Account assignment characteristic that sorts operating expenses according to functions, for
example:
1. Production
2. Administration
3. Sales
4. Research and development
You can enter the functional area in the master data of the following objects:
1. G/L account
2. Cost element
3. Cost center
4. Orders
Order type
Internal orders
Sales order for make-to-order production and requirements class
Maintenance, service, and QM order
Production order, product cost controller, and cost object hierarchy
5. WBS elements
Project profile and project definition
WBS element
6. Networks
Network type
Network header
Network activity
During posting, the system derives the functional area from the master data of the assigned objects.
- 26 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In order that expenses can be sorted according to corporate functions, the system derives the
functional area for the following postings.

Primary postings (postings in Financial Accounting) to a profit and loss account

Secondary postings (allocations in Controlling)


The functional area is derived for both objects involved in the allocation.
No functional area is derived in the following cases:
Postings to balance sheet accounts
When creating statistical key figures in Controlling
The system derives the functional area after saving. The derived functional area is thus first
available in the document created and not on the entry screen.
The system derives the functional area according to the following logic:
...
The system derives the functional area from the master data of the assigned objects. If an object
is assigned during a posting, the system checks whether a functional area has been entered in
the master record of the object. The system retains this functional area. However, it may be
overwritten by subsequent checks.

The system derives the functional area from the master record of the G/L account or the cost
element. The system checks whether a functional area is entered in the master record of the
cost element or the P&L account. This functional area overwrites the functional area derived
from the assigned object.

The system derives the functional area via substitution for the component Financial
Accounting, Event 0005. If a functional area has already been defined, this is overwritten with
the functional area obtained via substitution.

Definition of a substitution is necessary:

Where you are not able to enter a functional area in the master data of an object, for example
business process or real estate objects.
When you want to specify exceptions where derivation from the object should not occur.

PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition->financial Accounting-> Define Functional Area


Transaction Code: OKBD
Database Table: TFKB, TFKBT
Click on IMG activity
following window.

and click on New Entries

- 27 -

in displayed window so it give

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

Now click save

I.G.REDDY

button and click on back button

- 28 -

to go back to SPRO screen.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Maintain FM Area
PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition->financial Accounting-> Maintain FM Area
Transaction Code: OKBD
Database Table: FM01, FM01T
Click on IMG activity
following window.

Now click save

and click on New Entries

button and click on back button

in displayed window so it give

to go back to SPRO screen.

Define Segment:
Division of a company for which you can create financial statements for external reporting.
You can enter a segment in the master record of a profit center. The characteristic Segment is only
released in combination with the characteristic Profit Center. If no segment is specified manually
during posting (only possible for transactions in Financial Accounting), the segment is determined
from the master record of the profit center. This profit center can also be assigned manually or
derived. If you want to apply different rules to derive the segment during posting, you can define
your own rules for this.
IAS requires for segment reporting primary and secondary segmentation, which have different
reporting depth. A distinction is made between the following types of segment:
Business segment
A business segment is a distinguishable subactivity of a company that relates to the manufacture of
a product or the provision of a service and that has risks and revenues that differ from those in
other business segments.
Geographical segment
A geographical segment is a distinguishable subactivity of a company that relates to the
manufacture of a product or the provision of a service within a specific field of business. The risks
and revenues of a geographical segment differ from the subactivities in other fields of business.
You can choose which segment type you want to have as the primary or the secondary
segmentation. You can use the Segment dimension for the primary segmentation. You can
represent the secondary segmentation in your system. You can do this by including a user-defined
field Region in your general ledger accounting, for example.
- 29 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition->financial Accounting-> Define Segment


Database Table: FAGL_SEGM, FAGL_SEGMT
Click on IMG activity
following window.

Now click save

and click on New Entries

button and click on back button

in displayed window so it give

to go back to SPRO screen.

Define, copy, delete, check plant:


PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Logistics - General-> Define, copy, delete,
check plant
Transaction Code: OX14
Database Table: T001W
Click on IMG activity and click on Define Plant in the following window.

Now click on New Entries

in displayed window so it give following window.

- 30 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

Now click on save button

I.G.REDDY

so it will display address window as follow.

Click on enter button or click on continue button


back to SPRO screen.
- 31 -

so it will save, click on back button

to go

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Define Location:
PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Logistics - General-> Define Location
Database Table: T499S
Click on IMG activity and now click on New Entries
give following window.

Now click on save button

so it will display address window as follow.

- 32 -

in displayed window so it

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Click on enter button or click on continue button


back to SPRO screen

so it will save, click on back button

to go

Define, copy, delete, check division:


PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Logistics - General-> Define, copy, delete,
check division
Transaction Code: OVXB
Database Table: TSPA, TSPAT
Click on IMG activity and click on Define Division in the following window

.
Now click on New Entries

Now click on save button

in displayed window so it give following window

and click on back button

to go back to SPRO screen.

Define, copy, delete, check sales organization:


PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Sales and Distribution-> Define, copy, delete,
check sales organization
Transaction Code: OVX5
Database Table: TVKO, TVKOT
Click on IMG activity and click on Define Sales Organization in the following window.
- 33 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

Now click on New Entries

Now click on save button

I.G.REDDY

in displayed window so it give following window

so it will display address window as follow.

- 34 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Click on enter button or click on continue button


back to SPRO screen

so it will save, click on back button

to go

Define, copy, delete, check distribution channel:


PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Sales and Distribution-> Define, copy, delete,
check distribution channel
Transaction Code: OVXI
Database Table: TVTW, TVTWT
Click on IMG activity and click on Define Distribution Channel in the following window.

Now click on New Entries

in displayed window so it give following window

- 35 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

Now click on save button

I.G.REDDY

and click on back button

to go back to SPRO screen

Maintain sales office


PATH:: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Sales and Distribution-> Maintain sales office
Transaction Code: OVX1
Database Table: TVBUR, TVKBT
Click on IMG activity
give following window

Now click on save button


.

and Now click on New Entries

so it will display address window as follow.

- 36 -

in displayed window so it

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Click on enter button or click on continue button


back to SPRO screen

so it will save, click on back button

to go

Maintain sales group:


PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Sales and Distribution-> Maintain sales group.
Transaction Code: OVX4
Database Table: TVGRT, TVKGR.
Click on IMG activity
give following window

Now click on save button

and now click on New Entries

, and click on back button


- 37 -

in displayed window so it

to go back to SPRO screen

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 38 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Maintain storage location


PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Materials Management-> Maintain storage
location.
Transaction Code: OX09
Database Table: T001L, TWLAD
Click on IMG activity it will ask plant as follow.

Enter plant and click enter or continue button


now click on New Entries

in displayed window so it give following window

Enter the storage location and description and save it.

- 39 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Select this
line.

Click on this

Now select your storage location and pre on Address of Storage Location under dialog structure.
So it will display the following window on this click on New Entries

In the above widow enter number 1 and click on save button


follow.

- 40 -

so it will display address widow as

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Click on enter button or click on continue button


back to SPRO screen

so it will save, click on back button

to go

Maintain purchasing organization


PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Materials Management-> Maintain purchasing
organization.
Transaction Code: OX08
Database Table: T024E
Click on IMG activity

it will display following window on this click on New Entries

in above screen fill required data and save button


SPRO screen
- 41 -

and click on back button

to go back to

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Define, copy, delete, check shipping point:


PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Logistics Execution -> Define, copy, delete,
check shipping point.
Transaction Code: OVXD
Database Table: TVST, TVSTT
Click on IMG activity it will display following window on this click on Define Shipping Point.

click on New Entries

. And fill the required fields as follow.

- 42 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

Now click on save button

I.G.REDDY

so it will display address widow as follow.

- 43 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Click on enter button or click on continue button


back to SPRO screen

so it will save, click on back button

to go

Maintain loading point


PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Logistics Execution -> Maintain loading point
Transaction Code: OVX7
Database Table: TVLA, TVLAT
Click on IMG activity it will display following window on this Define Shipping Point and click
enter.

click on New Entries

Now click on save button

. And fill the required fields as follow.

and click on back button

to go back to SPRO screen.

Maintain transportation planning point


PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Logistics Execution -> Maintain transportation
planning point.
Transaction Code: OVXT
Database Table: TTDS, TTDST
Click on IMG activity
it will display following window on this click on New Entries
. And fill the required fields as follow

- 44 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

Now click on save button

I.G.REDDY

so it will display address widow as follow.

Click on enter button or click on continue button


back to SPRO screen

so it will save, click on back button

to go

ASSIGNMENT
Assign company code to company:
PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure-> Assignment -> Financial Accounting -> Assign company
code to company.
Transaction Code: OX16
Database Table: T001
Click on IMG activity

it will display following window, click on position button

so it will display the following small window:

- 45 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

On this entry your company code and pres enter or click on continue button. So it will display your
company code at the top of window as follow.

In above screen 1102 is your company code for that you have to assign your top company code
1101.
Now click on save button
screen.

to save and to back click on back button

to go back to SPRO

Assign company code to credit control area


PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure-> Assignment -> Financial Accounting -> Assign company
code to credit control area.
Transaction Code: OB38
Database Table: T001
Click on IMG activity

it will display following window, click on position button

so it will display the following small window:

On this entry your company code and pres enter or click on continue button. So it will display your
company code at the top of window as follow.

- 46 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Against to your company code assign your credit control area.


Now click on save button
screen.

to save and to back click on back button

to go back to SPRO

Assign company code to financial management area:


PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure-> Assignment -> Financial Accounting -> Assign company
code to financial management area.
Transaction Code: OF18
Database Table: T001
Click on IMG activity

it will display following window, click on position button

so it will display the following small window:

On this entry your company code and pres enter or click on continue button. So it will display your
company code at the top of window as follow.

Against to your company code assign your FM Area.


- 47 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

Now click on save button


screen.

I.G.REDDY

to save and to back click on back button

to go back to SPRO

Assign plant to company code:


PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure-> Assignment -> Logistics - General-> Assign Assign plant
to company code.
Transaction Code: OX18
Database Table: T001K, T001W, TASSIGN_MM_T001W
Click on IMG activity
it will display following window, click on new Entries
button

In the above screen enter your company code and plant.


Now click on save button to save and to back click on back button
screen.

to go back to SPRO

Assign Business Area to Plant/Valuation Area and Division:


PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure-> Assignment -> Logistics - General-> Assign Business Area
to Plant/Valuation Area and Division
Transaction Code: OMJ7
Database Table: T134G, T134H
Click on IMG activity it will display following window, click on Plant/valuation area Division
button

- 48 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

It will display following window, click on new Entries button

Now fill the details of plant, division, business area.


Now click on save button
screen.

to save and to back click on back button

to go back to SPRO

Assign sales organization to company code:


PATH: SPROEnterprise Structure Assignment Sales and Distribution Assign sales
organization to company code
Transaction Code: OVX3
Database Table: TASSIGN_SD_VKORG, TVKO
Click on IMG activity
it will display following window, click on position button
so it will display the following small window:
- 49 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

On this entry your sales organization and pres enter or click on continue button. So it will display
your company code at the top of window as follow.

To your sales organization assign your company code.


Now click on save button to save and to back click on back button
screen.

to go back to SPRO

Assign distribution channel to sales organization:


PATH: SPROEnterprise Structure Assignment Sales and Distribution Assign
distribution channel to sales organization.
Transaction Code: OVXK
Database Table: V_TVKOV_ASSIGN, TVKOV
it will display following window, click on new Entries
Click on IMG activity
button

In the above screen assign distribution channel to sales organization.


Now click on save button to save and to back click on back button
screen.
- 50 -

to go back to SPRO

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Assign division to sales organization:


PATH: SPROEnterprise Structure Assignment Sales and Distribution Assign division to
sales organization.
Transaction Code: OVXA
Database Table: V_TVKOS_ASSIGN, TVKOS
Click on IMG activity
it will display following window, click on new Entries
button

In the above window assign division to sales organization.


Now click on save button to save and to back click on back button
screen.

to go back to SPRO

Set up sales area:


PATH: SPROEnterprise Structure Assignment Sales and Distribution Set up sales area.
Transaction Code: OVXG
Database Table: V_TVTA_ASSIGN, TVTA
Click on IMG activity
it will display following window, click on new Entries
button

Assign sales organization to distribution channel and distribution channel to division.


Now click on save button to save and to back click on back button
to go back to SPRO
screen.
Assign sales office to sales area:

- 51 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

PATH: SPROEnterprise Structure Assignment Sales and Distribution Assign sales


office to sales area
Transaction Code: OVXM
Database Table: V_TVKBZ_ASSIGN, TVKBZ
Click on IMG activity
it will display following window, click on new Entries
button

In this screen assign sales organization to distribution channel, distribution channel to division,
division to sale office.
to go back to SPRO
Now click on save button to save and to back click on back button
screen.
Assign sales group to sales office:
PATH: SPROEnterprise Structure Assignment Sales and Distribution Assign sales
group to sales office.
Transaction Code: OVXJ
Database Table: V_TVBVK_ASSIGN, TVBVK
Click on IMG activity
it will display following window, click on new Entries
button

In this screen sales group is assigned to sales office.


Now click on save button to save and to back click on back button
screen.

Assign sales organization - distribution channel plant:


- 52 -

to go back to SPRO

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

PATH: SPROEnterprise Structure Assignment Sales and Distribution Assign sales


organization - distribution channel plant.
Transaction Code: OVX6
Database Table: V_TVKWZ_ASSIGN, TVKWZ
Click on IMG activity
it will display following window, click on new Entries
button

Assign sales organization to distribution channel and distribution channel to plant.


Now click on save button
screen.

to save and to back click on back button

to go back to SPRO

Assign sales area to credit control area:


PATH: SPROEnterprise Structure Assignment Sales and Distribution Assign sales area
to credit control area.
Transaction Code: OVFL
Database Table: V_TVTA_KKB, TVTA
Click on IMG activity
button.

it will display following window, click on

So your sales area will appears at top of screen.

Assign credit control area to sales area.


Now click on save button to save and to back click on back button
screen.
- 53 -

to go back to SPRO

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Define Rules By Sales Area:


PATH: SPROEnterprise Structure Assignment Sales and Distribution Business Area
Account Assignment Define Rules By Sales Area.
Transaction Code: OVF2
Database Table: V_TVTA_GRE, TVTA
Click on IMG activity
button.

it will display following window, click on

Now pres enter so your sales organization display on the top of window.

In this step assign Rule 1 to your sales organization.


1-Business area determination from plant/division (T134G)
Now click on save button to save and to back click on back button
screen.

- 54 -

to go back to SPRO

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Assign purchasing organization to company code


PATH: SPROEnterprise Structure Assignment Materials Management Assign
purchasing organization to company code.
Transaction Code: OX01
Database Table: V_T024E_ASSIGN, T024E
Click on IMG activity
button.

it will display following window, click on

Type your purchasing organization and pres enter so that will appears on the top of the scree.

Now assign your company code to your purchasing organization.


Now click on save button to save and to back click on back button
screen.

to go back to SPRO

Assign purchasing organization to plant:


PATH: SPROEnterprise Structure Assignment Materials Management Assign
purchasing organization to plant
Transaction Code: OX17
Database Table: W_T024W_ASSIGNT024W
Click on IMG activity
it will display following window, click on new Entries
button

- 55 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

Now click on save button


screen.

I.G.REDDY

to save and to back click on back button

to go back to SPRO

Assign shipping point to plant


Assign purchasing organization to plant:
PATH: SPROEnterprise Structure Assignment Logistics Execution Assign shipping
point to plant
Transaction Code: OVXC
Database Table: OVXC, TVSWZ
The following widow will display now pres ctrl+f

In the small window type your plant and pres enter so your plant will appears on the top of screen
as follow.

- 56 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Double click on your plant

Flag on the heck box which


is your shipping point

In this screen double click on your plant so it will display another window on this small window
search your shipping point and flag the check box and pres enter or continue button so your
shipping point will assign to your plant.

Like above your assignment will be completed.


Now click on save button to save and to back click on back button
screen.

- 57 -

to go back to SPRO

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Define Common Distribution Channels


PATH: SPRO Sales and Distribution Master Data Define Common Distribution Channels.
Transaction Code: VOR1
Database Table: TVKOV, TVTA
Click on IMG activity
window:

and click on

so it will display the following

In the above window enter your sales organization and pres enter or click on continue button.
It will display your sales organization on the top of window as follow:

In this screen assign your distribution Channel to your sales organization.


Now click save

button and click on back button

to go back.

Define Common Divisions


PATH: SPRO Sales and Distribution Master Data Define Common Divisions
Transaction Code: VOR2
Database Table: TVKOS, TVTA
Click on IMG activity
window:

and click on

so it will display the following

- 58 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above window enter your sales organization and pres enter or click on continue button.
It will display your sales organization on the top of window as follow:

In the above screen assign division to your sales organization.


Now click save

button and click on back button

- 59 -

to go back.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

FISCAL YEAR
You have the following options for defining your fiscal year variants in relation to the calendar
year:
Fiscal year same as calendar year
Fiscal year differs from calendar year (non-calendar fiscal year). The posting periods can also be
different to the calendar months.
Your fiscal year is year-dependent
This means that the fiscal year only applies to a specific calendar year.
Fiscal Year Same as Calendar Year
If your fiscal year is the same as the calendar year, the following specifications apply:

The fiscal year begins on January 1.


Twelve posting periods are available.
The periods correspond to calendar months. You do not have to define the individual
periods. The system automatically uses the calendar months.

Non-Calendar Fiscal Year


If your fiscal year differs from the calendar year, you must specify:

How many posting periods you require


How the system should determine the posting period and fiscal year from the posting date
during posting:
To enable the system to determine the posting period, specify month and day limits for the
end of each period.

Fiscal Year
Since your fiscal year is not the same as the calendar year, you have to specify the year
displacement for each posting period. You can use the entries -1, 0, and +1 for this.
In the illustration that follows, your fiscal year begins on April 1 and ends on March 31. The period
limits correspond to the beginning and end of the calendar months.
Since the fiscal year does not correspond to the calendar year, you specify how the fiscal year is to
be determined by entering the year displacement. If you post with a posting date of 02/03/99, the
system uses your definition of the fiscal year variant to determine that posting period 11 is in fiscal
year 1998.

- 60 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Posting Periods Do Not Correspond To Calendar Months. If you are using a non-calendar fiscal
year, and your posting periods do not correspond to the calendar months, define the difference by
specifying the day of the period end.
Your fiscal year begins on April 16 and ends on April 15. The start and end of your posting periods
do not correspond to the start and end of a calendar month.
You must split the period 12/16 to 01/15 in two posting periods, since you require different
specifications for the year displacement. This means that for posting period 9, you have to define
two posting periods (with year displacements 0 and -1).

In the example given, the system would determine the following posting periods and fiscal years
from the posting dates given:
Posting Date

Year Displacement

Period

Fiscal Year

20.12.1998

1998

13.01.1999

-1

1998

- 61 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Year-Dependent Fiscal Year Variants


You can define a year-dependent fiscal year variant. This is a fiscal year variant that only applies to
a specific calendar year.
To do this, select the field Year-dependent when you define your fiscal year variants. You then
have to enter the period ends, defined by month and day limits, for each calendar year.
In this case, the year displacement specifications refer to the calendar year for which you have
defined posting periods. The year is displayed when you maintain the period ends.
Special Periods
Special posting periods that subdivide the last regular posting period for closing operations.
Irrespective of how you have defined your fiscal year, you can also use special periods. Special
periods subdivide the year-end closing period. They therefore merely divide the last posting period
into several closing periods. This enables you to create several supplementary financial statements.

A fiscal year usually has 12 posting periods. In General Ledger Accounting, you can define up to
four special periods.
If you do not need 12 posting periods, you can use the posting periods that are not required as
special periods. If you use these additional closing periods, you must specify the number you
require in the field No. special periods. when defining the fiscal year variants. You cannot exceed a
maximum of 16 periods.
When posting to special periods, you must take the following into consideration:
The posting date must fall within the last regular posting period.
You have to enter the special periods in the document header in the Period field, since the
special periods cannot be determined automatically by the system.
Maintain Fiscal Year Variant (Maintain Shortened Fisc. Year)
PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
LedgersFiscal Year and Posting PeriodsMaintain Fiscal Year Variant (Maintain Shortened
Fisc. Year).
Transaction code: OB29
Database Table: T009, T009T
Click on

(IMG Activity), it will take to another screen. Here pres on

- 62 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

Click on save button

I.G.REDDY

to save the activity and go back

to SPRO screen.

NOTE: If your Fiscal Year is Non-Calendar year (with 12 months) the following way is to perform
the activity.
Click on

(IMG Activity), it will take to another screen. Here pres on

2) Double click on
this structure

1) Select this line

Click on save button to save the activity and select the line which you just enter and double click
on periods option under dialog structure, so it will take to another screen as follows.

- 63 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

Click on save button

I.G.REDDY

to save the activity and go back

to SPRO screen.

NOTE: If your Fiscal Year is Non-Calendar year with 24 months the following way is to perform
the activity.

Double click on
this structure

Select this line

Click on save button to save the activity and select the line which you just enter and double click
on periods option under dialog structure, so it will take to another screen as follows.

- 64 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

Click on save button

I.G.REDDY

to save the activity and go back

to SPRO screen.

Assign Company Code to a Fiscal Year Variant


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
LedgersFiscal Year and Posting Periods Assign Company Code to a Fiscal Year Variant.
Transaction code: OB37
Database Table: T001, T882
Click on
(IMG Activity), in this screen click on
an small window:

- 65 -

button, so it will display

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Enter your company code and pres enter button or click on continue button. Your company code
will display on the top of the screen as follow.

Now enter your Fiscal Year Variant.


Click on save button to save the activity and go back

to SPRO screen.

POSTING PERIODS
When you record a document, you enter the posting date. When you post the document, the system
uses the posting date specified to automatically determine the posting period. The posting period
consists of a month and a fiscal year.
These are both displayed in the document overview. The posting period determined is entered in
the document and the transaction figures for this period are updated.
For postings to the previous fiscal year, the system carries out the following adjustments:
For balance sheet accounts, the system adjusts the carry forward balance of the accounts concerned
in the current fiscal year.
For profit and loss accounts, the profit or loss carried forward to the retained earnings account is
adjusted.
Define Variants for Open Posting Periods
PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
LedgersFiscal Year and Posting Periods Posting Periods Define Variants for Open Posting
Periods.
Transaction code: OBBO
Database Table: T010O, T010P
Click on

(IMG Activity), it will take to another screen. Here pres on

- 66 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Enter new variant and description in this screen.


Click on save button to save the activity and go back

- 67 -

to SPRO screen.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Assign Variants to Company Code


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
LedgersFiscal Year and Posting Periods Posting Periods Assign Variants to Company
Code.
Transaction code: OBBP
Database Table: T001
Click on
(IMG Activity), in this screen click on
an small window:

button, so it will display

Enter your company code and pres enter button or click on continue button. Your company code
will display on the top of the screen as follow.

In this screen assign your posting periods variant (which you created in above step) to your
company code.
Click on save button

to save the activity and go back

to SPRO screen.

Open and Close Posting Periods


You define posting periods in your fiscal year variants. You can open and close these posting
periods for posting. As many periods as you require can be open for posting simultaneously.
Usually, only the current posting period is open for posting, all other posting periods are closed. At
the end of this posting period, the period is closed, and the next posting period is opened. Special
periods can be open for closing postings during the period-end closing. You have the following
options for opening and closing posting periods.
- 68 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Posting Period Variants


You can specify which company codes are open for posting in a posting period variant. Posting
period variants are cross-company code and you have to assign them to your company codes. The
posting periods are then opened and closed simultaneously for all company codes via the posting
period variants.
Working with posting period variants is recommended if you are responsible for a large number of
company codes. Since you only have to open and close the posting period once for the variant,
your work is considerably reduced.
Account Type
You can differentiate the opening and closing of posting periods by account type. This means that
for a specific posting period, postings can be permitted to customer accounts, but not to vendor
accounts. For each posting period that should be open, you must always specify at least account
type. You can exercise more detailed control by specifying further account types.
Using the minimum entry, when you enter the posting date in the document header, the system
checks whether the posting period determined in the posting period variant can be posted to. As
soon as you then enter an account number, in a second step, the system checks whether the posting
period is permitted for the account specified.
Account Interval
You can differentiate the opening and closing of posting periods by account intervals. This means
that you only open a posting period for posting to a specific account.
Account intervals always apply to G/L accounts. If you want to open sub ledger accounts, you have
to enter the corresponding reconciliation account and the account type.
During the closing operations, you can, for example, use the reconciliation accounts to close
customer and vendor accounts before G/L accounts. This allows you to prevent further postings to
these accounts after you have confirmed the balances with your customers and vendors. Balance
confirmation is one of the prerequisites for further closing operations.
You can open and close posting periods only for specific users. To do this, enter an authorization
group at document header level. This authorization group is effective only in time period 1 and
prevents users who do not have the appropriate authorization for the authorization object
F_BKPF_BUP (accounting document: Authorization for posting periods) from posting in periods
which are only open for time period 1.
Example:

PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)


LedgersFiscal Year and Posting Periods Posting Periods Open and Close Posting Periods.
- 69 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Transaction code: OB52


Database Table: T001B
Click on

(IMG Activity), it will take to another screen. Here pres on

Enter the parameters as the client required.


Click on save button

to save the activity and go back

to SPRO screen.

Define Ledgers for General Ledger Accounting


Ledger
A ledger is a section of a database table. A ledger only contains those dimensions of the totals table
that the ledger is based on and that are required for reporting.
In General Ledger Accounting, you can use several ledgers in parallel. This allows you to produce
financial statements according to different accounting principles, for example. You create a ledger
for each of the general ledgers you need.
A ledger uses several dimensions from the totals table it is based on. Each dimension of the totals
table represents a subset of the coding block. You can also include customer fields in your ledgers.
To do this, you have to add the customer field to the coding block and then include this field in the
totals table that the ledger is based on.
Non-leading ledger
The non-leading ledgers are parallel ledgers to the leading ledger. They can be based on a local
accounting principle, for example. You have to activate a non-leading ledger for the individual
company codes.
Posting procedures with sub ledger or G/L accounts managed on an open item basis always affect
all ledgers. This means that you cannot perform ledger-specific postings to sub ledger or G/L
accounts managed on an open item basis. If you manage G/L accounts on an open item basis to
monitor accounting aspects such as reserve allocations and reversals, you need to take additional
measures in your internal controls system.
Non-leading ledgers can have different fiscal year variants and different posting period variants per
company code to the leading ledger of this company code. The second and third currency of the
- 70 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

non-leading ledger must be a currency that is managed as second or third currency in the respective
company code. However, you do not have to have a second and third currency in the parallel
ledgers; these are optional. Alternative currencies are not possible.
Rollup ledgers
In addition to your parallel ledgers, you can also define a rollup ledger for special reporting
purposes. In a rollup ledger, you can combine summarized data from other ledgers in General
Ledger Accounting. This enables you to compile cumulated reports on different ledgers.
Day ledgers
You use a day ledger to create a day ledger if you want to create reports for average balances
(reports for displaying average daily balances). You can activate the day ledger for drilldown
reporting.
You may not define day ledgers as the leading ledger or as the representative ledger in a ledger
group.
NON LEADING LEDGERS
PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Ledgers Ledgers Define Ledgers for General Ledger Accounting
Database Table:
V_FAGL_T881
Click on

T881;

FAGL_TLDGRP;

FAGL_TLDGRPT;

FAGL_TLDGRP_MAP;

(IMG Activity), it will take to another screen. Here pres on

Click on this F4
function to get this
Totals Table

Click on save button to save the activity and go back


Define and Activate Non-Leading Ledgers

to SPRO screen.

PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)


Ledgers Ledgers Define and Activate Non-Leading Ledgers
Database Table: V_FAGL_T882G, T882G
Click on

(IMG Activity), It will display an small window and ask for a ledger:

- 71 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Enter your one of the non-leading ledgers (X1) and pres enter or click continue button
take to another screen. Now pres

so it will

button.

C1: Currency type First Currency


FV: Fiscal year variant
VAR: Posting Periods Variant
In this screen enter relevant parameters save
the same IMG activity.

it and go back

to SPRO screen and again pres

Now enter your another non-leading ledger (x2) and pres enter or click continue button
will take to another screen. Now pres

button.

- 72 -

so it

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

Click on save button

I.G.REDDY

to save the activity and go back

to SPRO screen.

Activate Cost of Sales Accounting


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Ledgers Ledgers Activate Cost of Sales Accounting.
Database Table: T001
(IMG Activity), so will take you to screen there click on
Click on
button so it will display following small window:

Enter your company code and pres enter button or click on continue button. Your company code
will display on the top of the screen as follow

Click on this so it
will display options

Options or 1. Inactive 2. In preparation 3. Active


- 73 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Out of above 3 options select Active option against your company code.
Click on save button

to save the activity and go back

to SPRO screen.

Define Field Status Variants


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
LedgersFields Define Field Status Variants.
Transaction Code: OBC4
Database Table: T001F, T001G, T001V, T001W
Click on

(IMG Activity), it will take open the screen.

2) After selecting
FSTV click on this
copy as button

1) Select this FSTV

in this screen select 1000 Field status variants and pres Cops as Button
following screen.

In the above screen change the FStv and field status name as follow.

- 74 -

so it will display the

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

1) click on
this button

After changing the name of variant and description just pres enter button it will display an small
information window. Now we have to click on Copy all it will display another information
button just pres enter or continue button.

Your field status is copied:


Click on save button

to save the activity and go back

to SPRO screen.

Assign Company Code to Field Status Variants


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
LedgersFields Assign Company Code to Field Status Variants.
Transaction Code: OBC5
Database Table: T001
(IMG Activity), so will take you to screen there click on
Click on
button so it will display following small window:

- 75 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Enter your company code and pres enter button or click on continue button. Your company code
will display on the top of the screen as follow

In the above screen assign you field status variant to your company code:
Click on save button

to save the activity and go back

- 76 -

to SPRO screen.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

DOCUMENT TYPES
Document types we distinguish between original documents and IT documents. Examples of
original documents are receipts, invoices, checks, or bank statements. Examples of IT documents
are accounting documents, sample documents, or recurring entry documents.
The accounting document reproduces the original document in the system. All other IT documents
are used as entry tools. Each document then remains in the system as a coherent unit until it is
archived.
Documents are essential for checking the accuracy of postings in the compact journal and general
ledger. For this reason, each posting is based on a document.
Documents represent the link between the business transaction and posting in accounting.
Only complete documents can be posted in the SAP system. "Complete" means that the balance
from the debit and credit items is zero. Further conditions for posting a document are that you must
enter the basic account assignment data, such as document date, posting date, document type,
posting key, account number, and amounts. You must make entries in all the required fields (these
are defined as "required" during system configuration).
A document consists of a document header and at least two document line items:

Document Header

The document header is a part of the document that contains information that applies to the entire
document, such as the document date and document number. It also includes controlling
information such as the document type.

Document Line Item

The document line item is a part of the document that contains information on an item. This
includes the amount, an account number, whether the item is a debit or credit, and additional
information depending on the transaction to be posted. A document line item can also contain
additional account assignments (for example, profit center, cost center) and an explanatory text.

Document Views

You can display a document in two different views in General Ledger Accounting:

Entry View

In the entry view, a document contains the document line items originally entered or transferred
from the original component.

General Ledger View

In the general ledger view, a document contains the document line items originally entered or
transferred from the original component, split line items generated by document splitting, or
additionally generated clearing items. Documents in the general ledger view always apply to a
specific ledger.
- 77 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

You can display the posted documents in the entry view and in the general ledger view. For more
information, see Document Display.
The document type has the following functions:
Differentiating between business transactions. The document type tells you instantly what sort of
business transaction is in question. This is useful, for example, when displaying line items for an
account.
Controlling the posting to account types (vendor, customer, or G/L accounts). The document type
determines which account types that particular document can be posted to.

Assigning document numbers:


A number range is assigned to every document type. The numbers for the documents you create
are taken from this number range. The original documents from one number range should be stored
together. In this way, the document type controls document storage.
To ensure that the document numbers in the leading ledger as well as those in the non-leading
ledgers do not present any gaps, you should define a document type with its own number range for
postings from valuations to the leading ledger. You then use this document type for valuation
postings to the non-leading ledgers as well. Notwithstanding, you assign a distinct number range to
this document type for postings from valuations to non-leading ledgers.
In General Ledger Accounting, the document types you define for the documents in the entry view
need to be different to those for the documents in the general ledger view:
Document Types for Documents in Entry View
For your leading ledger, you can use the document types delivered by SAP or you can define your
own document types.
For your non-leading ledgers, you only need to define separate document types for documents in
the entry view for
those ledgers that are used as the representative ledger in a ledger group.
Document Types for Documents in General Ledger View
For the leading ledger, the document in the entry view corresponds to the document in the general
ledger view. Consequently, you do not need to define separate document types for documents in
the general ledger view.
For your non-leading ledgers, you only need to define separate document types for documents in
the general ledger view if the fiscal year variant of the non-leading ledger differs from the fiscal
year variant of the leading ledger in a given company code.
- 78 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Define Document Types for Entry View


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Document Document Types Define Document Types for Entry View
Transaction Code: OBA7
Database Table: T003, T003T
Click on

(IMG Activity), so will take you to screen as follow.

Select this details


button

Select Document
Type

Select one of the document type and select details button.

Like above for every document type it has its own parameters as per the transaction requirement.
SAP has provided all the Document Types for an industry so no need to prepare any new one.

- 79 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

If you want to prepare any new Document Type pres on


follow:

Click on save button

to save the activity and go back

and fill the parameters as

to SPRO screen.

Define Document Types for Entry View in a Ledger


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Document Document Types Define Document Types for Entry View in a Ledger
Database Table: T003, T003T
Click on

(IMG Activity), so it will display the follow window.

X1 is the Non-Leading Ledger which we created in above steps.


Now pres enter or click on continue button and pres
- 80 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 81 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

Click on save button

I.G.REDDY

to save the activity and go back

to SPRO screen.

Now again Click on


(IMG Activity), Define Document Types for Entry View in a Ledger so
it will display the follow window

X2 is the Non-Leading Ledger which we created in above steps.


Now pres enter or click on continue button and pres

- 82 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

Click on save button

I.G.REDDY

to save the activity and go back

- 83 -

to SPRO screen.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Define Document Types for General Ledger View


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
DocumentDocument Types Define Document Types for General Ledger View
Click on

(IMG Activity), so it will display the follow window.

X1 is the Non-Leading Ledger which we created in above steps.


Now pres enter or click on continue button and pres

- 84 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

Click on save button

I.G.REDDY

to save the activity and go back

to SPRO screen.

Now again Click on


(IMG Activity), Define Document Types for General Ledger View so it
will display the follow window

X2 is the Non-Leading Ledger which we created in above steps.


Now pres enter or click on continue button and pres

- 85 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

Click on save button

I.G.REDDY

to save the activity and go back

- 86 -

to SPRO screen.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

DOCUMENT NUMBER RANGES


In the SAP System, every document is assigned a number that identifies it uniquely within a fiscal
year and company code.
There are two types of number assignment:
External (by the user)
The accounting clerk enters the number of the original document during document entry, or the
number is transferred automatically from a pre-invoicing system. A prerequisite is that the
document numbers are unique. The system checks whether the number entered already exists and
prevents users from assigning the same number twice. Numbers assigned to documents that have
been archived however, can be reused.
Internal (by the system)
The system automatically assigns a sequential number. The accounting clerk transfers this SAP
document number to the printed original document and then files it using this number. This method
is used if the original documents do not have a unique document number. This is the case, for
example, with vendor invoices.
You use a number range to define how the document number is assigned. Each document type has
a specific number range from which the document number is selected.
When you reverse documents, the system automatically assigns a number for the reverse
document. To do this, the system requires a document type that has internal number assignment.
Every document type with external number assignment must therefore be assigned a reverse
document type that has internal number assignment.
Documents posted with a document type that has internal number assignment are reversed by the
system using the same document type if you do not specify a separate reverse document type.
Defining Number Ranges
You can define number ranges as follows:
You can define number ranges for each company code. Thus, each company code can use the same
number interval.
You can define number range intervals as year-specific.
You define number ranges in the system separately for master records and documents. You can
therefore use the same number range keys for both master records and documents.
In the Financial Accounting (FI) component, you can also define alphanumeric number ranges. In
this case, however, the document numbers can only be assigned externally.
It is advisable to select year-specific number ranges. You therefore only need smaller intervals and
can store the document numbers separately according to fiscal years. You therefore avoid
documents from the old and New Year alternating in January.
Since documents may be kept in the system for an indefinite amount of time, you need to define
intervals that are large enough to handle this factor.

- 87 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

To do this, you need to determine the volume of documents created each year for document types
that use the same number range.
Multiply the number of documents by the number of years the system can retain a document for.
This gives you the required interval capacity.
Specify an interval a little larger than that to make sure it is sufficient.
For every number range, you must specify the following parameters:
A key
A validity date (a year value) until which the number range is valid (see 2 in the following
diagram)
An interval from which the numbers are chosen (see 3 in the following diagram) The
intervals for number ranges must not overlap.

Define Document Number Ranges for Entry View


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Document Document Number Ranges Define Document Number Ranges for Entry View
Transaction Code: FBN1
Click on

(IMG Activity), so will take you to screen as follow.

Now enter your company code and pres on Edit Intervals button it will go to another screen as
follow.

- 88 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Now click on insert inter intervals button so it will display an separate window as follow.

After entering above data pres enter or click on insert button


com to mail screen.

so the data which you entered will

Now again click on insert inter intervals button so it will display same window and enter another
number range and interval.

These 2 are Non-Leading


Number ranges, these also
should be maintain in this
screen

Note: in the above screen we have to maintain the Non-Leading ledger Number ranges also.
Click on save button to save the activity and go back to SPRO screen.
Define Document Number Ranges for General Ledger View
PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Document Document Number Ranges Define Document Number Ranges for General Ledger
View.
- 89 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Transaction Code: FBN1


Click on

(IMG Activity), so will take you to screen as follow.

Now enter your company code and pres on Edit Intervals button it will go to another screen as
follow.

Now click on insert inter intervals button so it will display an separate window as follow.

After entering above data pres enter or click on insert button


com to mail screen.
- 90 -

so the data which you entered will

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Now again click on insert inter intervals button so it will display same window and enter another
number range and interval.

After entering above data pres enter or click on insert button


com to mail screen.

Click on save button

to save the activity and go back

Define Posting Keys


- 91 -

so the data which you entered will

to SPRO screen.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)


Document Define Posting Keys.
Transaction Code: OB41
Click on

(IMG Activity), so will take you to screen as follow.

Like above all posting keys are available in sap.

- 92 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Put curser on one of the key and select details button

as follow:

The above screen shows the parameters of each posting key. If your want to create new one just
click on Create

button and give maintain parameters and save it.

Most of all required posting are provided by SAP so need to create any new one.
CUSTOME
RS
Transaction
Posting key
0:Accounting Document
1: Invoice / Credit
Memo
2: Reverse Invoice /
Credit
Memo
3: Bank Charges /
Reverse
Bank Charges
4: Other Receivable
Payments
5: Outgoing / Incoming
Payments
6: Payment Clearing
7: Other Clearing
8: Payment Clearing
9: Spl GL Transaction

Dr
0

Cr
1

VENDORS
Dr
2

Cr
3

GENERA
L
LEDGER
Dr
Cr
4
5
40

01

11

21

31

02

12

22

32

03

13

04

14

24

34

05

15

25

35

06
07
08
09

16
17
18
19

26
27
28
29

36
37
38
39
- 93 -

50

ASSETS
Dr
7

Cr
7

70

75

MATERIA
LS
Dr
8

Cr
9

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

0: Inventory Taking
1: Inventory Cost
2: Inventory Difference
3: Prince Difference
4: Consumption
5: Changes in Stock
6: GR / IR
9: Stock Inward
Movement
The above table describes how posting keys are formulated for each transaction.

- 94 -

80
81
82
83
84
85
86

90
91
92
93
94
95
96

89

99

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Define Tolerance Groups for Employees


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Document Tolerance Groups Define Tolerance Groups for Employees.
Transaction Code: OBA4
Database Table: T043T
Click on
(IMG Activity), so will take you to screen here click on
following screen.

Maintain above parameters and save


Click on save button to save the activity and go back

it will take to

to SPRO screen.

Define Tolerance Groups for G/L Accounts


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Business
Transactions Open Item Clearing Clearing Differences Define Tolerance Groups for G/L
Accounts.
Transaction Code: OBA0
Database Table : T043S
Click on
(IMG Activity), so will take you to screen here click on
following screen.

- 95 -

it will take to

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

Click on save button

I.G.REDDY

to save the activity and go back

- 96 -

to SPRO screen.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Define Tolerances (Vendors)


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable
Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Menual Outgoing Payments Define Tolerances
(Vendors).
Transaction Code: OBA3
Database Table: T043G, T043GT
Click on
(IMG Activity), so will take you to screen here click on
following screen.

Click on save button

to save the activity and go back

- 97 -

to SPRO screen.

it will take to

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 98 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Chart of Account
Chart of Accounts
The chart of accounts list is a directory of all charts of accounts that can be used in a client. This is
a list of all G/L accounts used by one or several company codes.
For each G/L account, the chart of accounts contains the account number, account name, and the
information that controls how an account functions and how a G/L account is created in a company
code.You have to assign a chart of accounts to each company code. This chart of accounts is the
operating chart of accounts and is used for the daily postings in this company code.
You have the following options when using multiple company codes:
You can use the same chart of accounts for all company codes
If the company codes all have the same requirements for the chart of accounts set up, assign all of
the individual company codes to the same chart of accounts. This could be the case if all company
codes are in the same country.
In addition to the operating chart of accounts, you can use two additional charts of accounts
If the individual company codes need different charts of accounts, you can assign up to two charts
of accounts in addition to the operating chart of accounts. This could be the case if company codes
lie in multiple countries.
The use of different charts of accounts has no effect on the balance sheet and profit and loss
statement. When creating the balance sheet or the profit and loss statement, you can choose
whether to balance the company codes which use different charts of accounts together or
separately.
Structure
Charts of accounts can have three different functions in the system:
Operating chart of accounts
The operating chart of accounts contains the G/L accounts that you use for posting in your
company code during daily activities. Financial Accounting and Controlling both use this chart of
accounts.
You have to assign an operating chart of accounts to a company code.
Group chart of accounts
The group chart of accounts contains the G/L accounts that are used by the entire corporate group.
This allows the company to provide reports for the entire corporate group.
The assigning of an corporate group chart of accounts to a company code is optional.
Country-specific chart of accounts
The country-specific chart of accounts contains the G/L accounts needed to meet the country's
legal requirements. This allows you to provide statements for the country's legal requirements.
The assigning of an country-specific chart of accounts to a company code is optional.
The operating chart of accounts is shared by Financial Accounting as well as Controlling. The
accounts in a chart of accounts can be both expense or revenue accounts in Financial Accounting
and cost or revenue elements in cost/revenue accounting.

- 99 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

G/L account master data in the chart of accounts area contains information about the G/L account
that is valid for all company codes. The chart of accounts area also contains data that controls how
a G/L account is created in the company code-specific area.

To make certain that company codes using the same chart of accounts can also use the same G/L
accounts, a master record is created for the G/L account in the chart of accounts and in the
company code-specific areas.
The following information is contained in the chart of accounts area of a G/L account master
record.
The chart of accounts
The account number and account name (short and long text)
The indicator that specifies whether the account is a balance sheet account or an P&L
statement account.
At the start of a new fiscal year, the balance of a balance sheet account is carried forward to itself.
With P&L statement accounts, you must specify the account to which the profit or loss is carried
forward at the end of a fiscal year.
The account group
With the account group, you group similar accounts together and control the creating and changing
of master records. They control
The account number interval in which the account number must lie.
The screen layout for creating G/L accounts in the company code-specific area. This means that
you can define whether fields require an entry, may have an entry, or are hidden when creating or
changing a master record in the company code-specific area.

Edit Chart of Accounts List


If you enter a chart of accounts in the chart of accounts list, note the importance of the following
settings:
Maintenance language
The chart of accounts is created and changed in one language, the maintenance language. This
means that the names of the G/L accounts are created and changed in the maintenance language. If
the chart of accounts is used by multiple company codes using varying languages, you can translate
the account names into the languages needed.
Group chart of accounts
You can assign an alternative group chart of accounts to the chart of accounts.
Length of the G/L account number
You can define the length of the G/L account numbers. The maximum length is ten characters.
Internally, the system keeps the account numbers with a ten character length. The system pads
purely numeric account numbers with zeroes from the left, and alphanumeric account numbers
from the right.

- 100 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Master


Data G/L Accounts Preparations Edit Chart of Accounts List.
Transaction Code: OB13
Database Table: T004, T004T
Click on
(IM Activity), so will take you to screen here click on
following screen.

Click on save button

to save the activity and go back

it will take to

to SPRO screen.

Define Account Group


The account group is a summary of accounts based on criteria that effects how master records are
created.
The account group determines:
The number interval from which the account number is selected when a G/L account is
created.
The screen layout for creating G/L accounts in the company code-specific area
When you create a G/L account in the chart of accounts area, you must specify an account group.
Using the account group, you can group the G/L accounts according to functional area. The
account group also defines the set up when creating a G/L account in the company code and chart
of accounts. By defining the number interval and the screen layout, you simplify G/L account
creation by reducing the number of entry fields.
The account group contains the following definitions:
Number interval
- 101 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

If you create a G/L account with this account group, you must select a number from this number
interval. Account number 131000 for G/L account petty cash would be rejected as incorrect since it
does not fall within the number interval of account group "Liquid funds". However, you could
create this account using the account number 101000.
The number intervals for G/L account groups can overlap. As a result, for G/L accounts that you
do not want to assign to any special functional area, you can create a separate account group that
has a number interval already contained in a different account group.

PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Master


Data G/L Accounts Preparations Define Account Group.
Transaction Code: OB13
Database Table: T077S, T077Z
Click on
(IM Activity), so will take you to screen here click on
following screen.

Click on save button

to save the activity and go back

- 102 -

to SPRO screen.

it will take to

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Define Retained Earnings Account


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Master
Data G/L Accounts Preparations Define Retained Earnings Account.
Transaction Code: OB53
Click on

(IM Activity), so will ask for Chart of accounts as follow:

In this screen enter your chart of accounts and pres enter or continue button.
It will display the following screen as follow:

Now click save button it will display following warning message.

Now just pres enter button twice and back to SPRO screen.

- 103 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Assign Company Code to Chart of Accounts


Transaction Code: OB62
Database Table: T001
It will display an screen in that pres

so it will display following window:

Enter your company code and pres enter or click on continue button so it display your company
code on the top of your screen.
Against to your company code assign your chart of accounts as follow:

Click on save button

to save the activity and go back

- 104 -

to SPRO screen.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 105 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Creation of Customer Account Goup


Define Account Groups with Screen Layout (Customers)
PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable
Customer Accounts Master Data Preparations for Creating Customer Master Data Define
Account Groups with Screen Layout (Customers).
Transaction Code: OBD2
Database Table: T077D
Click on
(IM Activity), so will take you to screen here click on
following screen.

Click on save button

to save the activity and go back

it will take to

to SPRO screen.

Define Screen Layout per Company Code (Customers)


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable
Customer Accounts Master Data Preparations for Creating Customer Master Data Define
Screen Layout per Company Code (Customers).
Transaction Code: OB21
Database Table: T079D
(IM Activity), so will take you to screen here click on
Click on
following screen.

- 106 -

it will take to

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Just enter your company code and pres enter button.


Click on save button

to save the activity and go back

- 107 -

to SPRO screen.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Create Number Ranges for Customer Accounts


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable
Customer Accounts Master Data Preparations for Creating Customer Master Data Create
Number Ranges for Customer Accounts.
Transaction Code: XDN1
Click on

(IM Activity),

so will take you to screen here click on

(Change Intervals ) button.

It will take to another screen in this screen click on


display following screen.

Now pres enter key or click on


Click on save button

(Insert Interval) button so it will

insert button. So it will take the entry to main screen.

to save the activity and go back

- 108 -

to SPRO screen.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 109 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Assign Number Ranges to Customer Account Groups


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable
Customer Accounts Master Data Preparations for Creating Customer Master Data Assign
Number Ranges to Customer Account Groups.
Transaction Code: OBAR
Database Table: T077D
Click on
window.

(IM Activity), click on

button so it display following small

Enter your Account group and pres enter or continue button so your account group will display on
the top of screen as follow:

Against to your customer account group assign your number range which your created in the above
steps:
Click on save button

to save the activity and go back

- 110 -

to SPRO screen.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Creation Account Group of Vendors


Define Account Groups with Screen Layout (Vendors)
PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable
Vendor Accounts Master Data Preparations for Creating Vendor Master Data Define
Account Groups with Screen Layout (Vendors)
Transaction Code: OBD3
Database Table: T077K, T077Y
Click on
(IM Activity), so will take you to screen here click on
following screen.

Click on save button

to save the activity and go back

it will take to

to SPRO screen.

Define Screen Layout per Company Code (Vendors)


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable
Vendor Accounts Master Data Preparations for Creating Vendor Master Data Define
Screen Layout per Company Code (Vendors)
Transaction Code: OB24
Database Table: T079K
(IM Activity), so will take you to screen here click on
Click on
following screen.

- 111 -

it will take to

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

Click on save button

I.G.REDDY

to save the activity and go back

- 112 -

to SPRO screen.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Create Number Ranges for Vendor Accounts


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable
Vendor Accounts Master Data Preparations for Creating Vendor Master Data Create
Number Ranges for Vendor Accounts
Transaction Code: XKN1
Click on

(IM Activity),

so will take you to screen here click on

(Change Intervals ) button.

It will take to another screen in this screen click on


display following screen.

Now pres enter key or click on

(Insert Interval) button so it will

insert button. So it will take the entry to main screen.

- 113 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Click on save button

I.G.REDDY

to save the activity and go back

- 114 -

to SPRO screen.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Assign Number Ranges to Vendor Account Groups


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable
Vendor Accounts Master Data Preparations for Creating Vendor Master Data Assign
Number Ranges to Vendor Account Groups
Transaction Code: OBAS
Database Table: T077K
Click on
window.

(IM Activity), click on

button so it display following small

Enter your Account group and pres enter or continue button so your account group will display on
the top of screen as follow:

Against to your customer account group assign your number range which your created in the above
steps:
Click on save button

to save the activity and go back

- 115 -

to SPRO screen.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 116 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

CONTROLLING
Maintain Controlling Area
PATH: SPRO Controlling General Controlling Organization Maintain Controlling
Area.
Transaction Code: OKKP
Database Table: T001, TKA00, TKA01, TKA02, TKA07, TKA09, TKT09, TKVS, TKVST
Click on
enter key

(IM Activity), select Maintain Controlling Area click on

It take to another screen, here click on


Now click on

button or pres

it will take to following screen.

button so it will display following small window.

Enter your company code and pres enter button or click on continue key.
So it will copy few parameters to this screen form company code parameters as follow.

- 117 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

The other parameters we have to maintain as follow:

Click this to
maintain

Now pres on save button

and pres on save button so it will display following dialogue box:

- 118 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Just pres enter key or pres on yes button it will save automatically.
Now double click on Assignment of company code at left side as in follow window:

Now click on

button and assign your company code as follow:

Now pres on save button

Now double click on Activate Components/Control Indicators at left side as I shown in


following window:

- 119 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

It will take to another screen here pres on


be in active. So we have active all of them as follow:

. In this screen nun of the components will

Click this to
maintain

Click on save button

And go back

to save the activity, it display the following information window:

to SPRO screen.

- 120 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Maintain Number Ranges for Controlling Documents


PATH: SPRO Controlling General Controlling Organization Maintain Number Ranges
for Controlling Documents.
Transaction Code: KANK
Click on

(IM Activity),

In above window enter your Controlling Area and pres on Maintain Groups button
So it will take to following screen:

In above window go to mane bar Group + Insert it will display following window:

- 121 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above window enter text and number range and pres enter key or click on insert
so it will appear on the top of main window as follow:

button

Select the check box and double click number range objects as follow (when you double click on
each number range objects the color of each object will change to blue from black)

Like above do for all number objects.


Now pres on

button which appears at top of the screen.

So your all number range objects will assign to your number range as follow:

- 122 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

Click on save button

I.G.REDDY

to save the activity and go back

to SPRO screen.

Maintain Versions
PATH: SPRO Controlling General Controlling Organization Maintain Versions.
Transaction Code: OKEQ
Click on

(IM Activity),

- 123 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Select Version 0 and double click on Settings for Each Fiscal Year. It will display following
screen:

In this window enter your controlling area and pres enter or click on continue key.

It will display another window click on

- 124 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Enter above parameters and Click on save button


following window:

In the above window pres YES:

- 125 -

to save the activity so it will display the

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above window type LP01 as Output Device and pres enter button or click on continue
button:

pres enter button or click on continue button:

Now click on

button and go back

to SPRO screen.

- 126 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

PROFIT CENTER ACCOUNTING


A profit center is an organizational unit in accounting that reflects a management-oriented structure
of the organization for the purpose of internal control.
You can analyze operating results for profit centers using either the cost-of-sales or the period
accounting approach.
By calculating the fixed capital as well, you can use your profit centers as investment centers.
Profit center Accounting at the profit center level is based on costs and revenues. These are
assigned statistically by multiple parallel updating to all logistical activities and other allocations of
relevance for a profit center.
The exchange of goods and services between profit centers can be valuated using the same
valuation approach as in financial accounting or another approach
The master data of a profit center includes the name of the profit center, the controlling area it is
assigned to, and the profit centers period of validity, as well as information about the person
responsible for the profit center, the profit centers assignment to a node of the standard hierarchy,
and data required for communication (address, telephone number and so on).
Every profit center is assigned to the organizational unit controlling area. This assignment is
necessary because Profit Center Accounting displays values in G/L accounts.
The system transfers all the data to Profit Center Accounting together with the G/L account to
which the data was originally posted. You can only aggregate data of this structure by using the
same
chart of accounts
fiscal year variant
currency
Maintain Controlling Area Settings
PATH: SPRO Controlling Profit Center Accounting Basic Settings Controlling Area
Settings Maintain Controlling Area Settings.
(IM Activity),
Click on

- 127 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

Click on save button

I.G.REDDY

to save the activity and go back

- 128 -

to SPRO screen.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Create Dummy Profit Center


The dummy profit center is the default profit center to which data is posted when the
corresponding object has not been assigned to a profit center.
You can find out which objects are not assigned to profit centers by analyzing the postings
assigned to the profit center. You can also assess or distribute data from the dummy profit center to
the desired profit centers.
It may happen that some objects in your system are inadvertently left without an assignment to a
profit center. In this case, postings to accounts which are defined as revenue or cost elements are
assigned to the dummy profit center of the controlling area to which the object posted to belongs.
This ensures that your internal and financial accounting data are reconciled.
You should not assign data intentionally to your dummy profit center for the purpose of allocating
it later. If desired, define a separate "allocation profit center" for this purpose.
PATH: SPRO Controlling Profit Center Accounting Master Data Profit Center
Create Dummy Profit Center
Transaction Code: KE59
Click on

(IM Activity), the following window will display:

Double click on EC-PCA: Create Dummy Profit Center or select that and click on
button.

- 129 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Type 1000 number as Dummy Profit center and click on Basic Data or pres enter key.

Maintain above parameters.


Click on save button to save the activity, and back to SPRO screen.

Define Profit Center


PATH: SPRO Controlling Profit Center Accounting Master Data Profit Center
Define Profit Center
Transaction Code: KE51
Click on

(IM Activity), the following window will display:

Double click on EC-PCA: Create Profit Center or select that and click on

- 130 -

button.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In Profit center field any number and click on Master Data button, it will take to following screen:

After maintaining above all parameters click on

Active Button. So it will save automatically.

Note: like above process you can create any number of profit centers as per client or project
requirement.

- 131 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Scenario in General Ledger Accounting


The scenario combines Customizing settings from different business views. In these Customizing
settings, you specify which posting data is transferred from different application components in
General Ledger Accounting, such as cost center update or profit center update.
For each scenario, the system transfers the posting data relevant for General Ledger Accounting
from the actual and plan documents.
Overview of the Scenarios Delivered by SAP
Scenario
Cost center update
Preparation for consolidation
Business area

Profit center update


Segment reporting

Cost of sales accounting

Fields Filled

Technical
Name
Cost center
RCNTR
Sender cost center
SCNTR
Trading partner
RASSC
Transaction type
RMVCT
Business area
RBUSA
Trading partner business SBUSA
area
Profit center
PPRCTR
Partner profit center
PRCTR
Profit center
PRCTR
Segment
PSEGMENT
Partner segment
SEGMENT
Functional area
RFAREA
Partner functional area
SFAREA

Field

You have to set up cost of sales accounting. The Functional Area field is not filled automatically
by the assignment of the scenario to your ledger.

Assign Scenarios and Customer Fields to Ledgers


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Ledgers Ledger Assign Scenarios and Customer Fields to Ledgers
Database Table: FAGL_LEDGER_SCEN
Click on

(IMG Activity),

- 132 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Select your ledger and double click on Scenarios so it will display another screen now click on
.

Click on this F4 function to


assign scenarios

Click on save button

to save the activity, it will display the following information window:

Just pres enter key or click on continue button and back to first screen.
Now select your another ledger.

- 133 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Select your ledger and double click on Scenarios so it will display another screen now click on
.

Click on save button

to save the activity, it will display the following information window:

Just pres enter key or click on continue button and back to SPRO screen.

- 134 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 135 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

DOCUMENT SPLITTING
Document splitting allows you to display documents using a differentiated representation. In the
representation, line items are split according to selected dimensions. In this way, you can draw up
complete financial statements for the selected dimensions at any time.
Using the document splitting procedure, you can also create a segmented display of a (partial)
balance sheet according to a set of legal requirements (for example, IAS) or according to areas of
responsibility.
In addition, you can allocate at the time of posting additional costs (such as realized or valuated
exchange rate differences) to the CO account assignment objects to which the costs relate. Assets
can also be subsequently capitalized at the time of posting.
Features
You can use the document splitting procedure to split up line items for selected dimensions (such
as receivable lines by profit center) or to effect a zero balance setting in the document for selected
dimensions (such as segment). This generates additional clearing lines in the document.
Document Splitting Process
For document splitting to be possible, the system classifies the individual line items as well as the
documents. This takes place using your settings in Customizing. Depending on how a document is
classified, the splitting rule selected for a document specifies how the document is split and for
which line items.
SAP delivers a set of standard splitting rules. You can also define your own rules.
Sub functions of Document Splitting
The following functions are part of document splitting:
1. Passive document splitting
2. Active document splitting
Passive document splitting
The system creates a reference to existing account assignments. These account assignments are
used as the basis for line items to be split. The system applies all account assignments that you
have defined as document splitting characteristics in Customizing.
If you have set the Zero Balance Setting indicator for the document splitting characteristic, the
system then creates any necessary clearing lines to ensure that the characteristics produce a balance
of zero in each document.
Passive document splitting comprises all document splitting processes, for example, clearing
processes that are determined program-internal and that you cannot control with settings in
Customizing. The processes of passive document splitting are used for the processes of active
document splitting and thus the splitting of the document itself.
By contrast, active document splitting comprises all processes used to split the document itself.
You control active document splitting using settings in Customizing.
- 136 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In these processes, the system creates a relationship to existing account assignments after
document entry. Let us suppose you want to enter a document to clear two receivables. The
account assignments of the line items of receivables are transferred into the line item to be created.
The line items can be split. The system applies all account assignments that you have defined as
document splitting characteristics in Customizing.
The system edits the following processes in passive document splitting depending on the business
process to split the document:
Clearing
Receivable clearing items are created here that form the basis for the line items to be split
Invoice Reference
A reference to one or more invoices is created here. The reference results from the document entry
by entering the invoice. The invoice in turn forms the basis for the line items to be split.
Zero Balance Setting per Document (Final Process):
You can define document splitting characteristics for the general ledger as relevant for the balance
sheet. To do this, you set the Zero Balance Setting indicator for the characteristic. In this case, the
system ensures that those characteristics produce a balance of zero in each document by creating
clearing lines. You can then create (partial) balance sheets on these characteristics. If you have
partner characteristics in the document, these are also filled. Partner characteristics describe the
sender and receiver relationships within a posting item.
Two different procedures are used when creating clearing lines:
If the partner characteristics are filled in the documents (for example, transfer of goods), then the
document balance is formed on the characteristics used in the balance sheet, and their partner
characteristics. The clearing lines are created in accordance with this balance since the partner
assignments already exist.
If the partner characteristics are not filled in the documents then the system forms two-sided
clearing lines according to an amount procedure. The generated clearing lines then receive the
partner assignment from the corresponding clearing line.
Active document splitting
In this sub function, the line items are split according to the settings in Customizing (the
classification of the document and the splitting rule assigned to the document).
Active document splitting comprises all processes used to split the document itself. You control
active document splitting using settings in Customizing.
By contrast, you cannot control passive document splitting. This is defined program-internal and
comprises all other document splitting processes such as clearing processes.
Active document splitting comprises the following functions:
The system splits the line items according to the classification of the document for a business
transaction and the assigned splitting rule. You define the classifications and the splitting rule in
Customizing and can adjust them there.
The splitting rule describes the relationships between sender and receiver of document splitting
characteristics based on classified posting lines.
- 137 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

You can use document splitting only for documents that can be uniquely assigned to a business
transaction.
Example:
You want to enter a payment and an invoice in a document. However, the document cannot be
assigned uniquely to a business transaction. The document cannot be posted.
You can also define splitting rules across company codes. The company code clearing lines get the
account assignments from the related company codes.

Example 1: Invoice
A vendor invoice is entered with the following items:
Posting
Key
31
40
40

Account
Payables
Expense
Expense

Segment

Amount

0001
0002

100.0040.00
60.00

Document splitting then creates the following document in the general ledger view:
Posting
Key
31
31
40
40

Account

Segment

Payables
Payables
Expense
Expense

0001
0002
0001
0002

Amount
40.0060.0040.00
60.00

Example 2: Payment
The payment for the above vendor invoice then contains the following items when entered
(PK = posting key):
PK Account
Segment
50 Bank
25 Payables
Cash Discount
50
0001
Received
Cash Discount
50
0002
Received

Amount
95.00100.00
2.003.00-

Document splitting then creates the following document in the general ledger view:
PK Account
50 Bank
50 Bank

Segment
0001
0002
- 138 -

Amount
38.0057.00-

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
25
25
50
50

I.G.REDDY

Payables
Payables
Cash Discount
Received
Cash Discount
Received

0001
0002

40.00
60.00

0001

2.00-

0002

3.00-

Overview of Document Splitting Process


Business Transaction: Payment with Residual Items without Invoice Reference
Two receivables of EUR 600 and EUR 400 are to be cleared.
This example shows the program-internal process flow and the processes of active and passive
document splitting.
Process Flow:

Business Process: Payment (Entry View)


Account

Amount

- 139 -

AcctAssgmt/
Item
PartnerAssgmt Category

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Initial
process

I.

situation:

I.G.REDDY

Business Bank

1000-

Residual
item

100

Interpretation of Customizing
Bank

900

S3

04000 (cash
account)
02000
(customer)
02000
(customer)

900

S3

Receivable 400-

S1

Receivable 600-

S2

04000 (cash
account)
02000
(customer)
02000
(customer)
02000
(customer)

Receivable 1000Residual
item

100

Passive Document Splitting for Clearing

Passive document splitting:


the amounts are determined
program-internal from the original
document

Cannot be set in Customizing

Creating receivable clearing


lines

III.

S3

Receivable

Derivation of business
transaction
(for
example,
payment/standard)

Assignment of item category


Check validity of item

categories for business transaction


II.

900

Bank

Residual
item

100

Active Document Splitting

Active document splitting Bank


since it can be set in Customizing

Residual items without Receivable


invoice reference are split based on
the receivable clearing items Receivable
(passively) that were split in the
previous step
Residual
item
Residual
item

900

S3

400-

S1

600-

S2

40

S1

60

S2

04000 (cash
account)
02000
(customer)
02000
(customer)
02000
(customer)
02000
(customer)

This is an example of document splitting without residual items. Residual items with invoice
reference are split passively!

IV.

Passive Document Splitting: Zero Balance Setting

Passive document splitting (in Bank


Customizing you can only set that
zero balances are calculated.)

900

- 140 -

S3

04000
(cash
account)

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

After the previous process


steps, a balance remains on account
assignments S1, S2, and S3.
Additional clearing lines need to be
created. In this way, the partner
characteristics are also filled.

* Zero balance posting (Free


balancing units)

I.G.REDDY

Receivable

400-

S1

Receivable

600-

S2

Residual
item
Residual
item
Clearing

40

S1

60

S2

360-

S3 / S1

02000
(customer)
02000
(customer)
02000
(customer)
02000
(customer)
01001*

Clearing

360

S1 / S3

01001*

Clearing

540-

S3 / S2

01001*

Clearing

540

S2 / S3

01001*

- 141 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Classify G/L Accounts for Document Splitting


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Business
Transactions Document Splitting Classify G/L Accounts for Document Splitting.
Database Table: T8G17
Click on

(IMG Activity), it will display the following small window.

Enter your company code and pres enter key or click on continue button, so it will take u to another
screens follow now pres on

button.

Enter the above specifications.


Click on save button

to save the activity and go back

- 142 -

to SPRO screen.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 143 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Creation of G/L Account


Definition
G/L account master data in the chart of accounts area contains information about the G/L account
that is valid for all company codes. The chart of accounts area also contains data that controls how
a G/L account is created in the company code-specific area.
To make certain that company codes using the same chart of accounts can also use the same G/L
accounts, a master record is created for the G/L account in the chart of accounts and in the
company code-specific areas.
Structure
The chart of accounts:
The account number and account name (short and long text)
The indicator that specifies whether the account is a balance sheet account or an P&L statement
account.
At the start of a new fiscal year, the balance of a balance sheet account is carried forward to itself.
With P&L statement accounts, you must specify the account to which the profit or loss is carried
forward at the end of a fiscal year.
The account group:
With the account group, you group similar accounts together and control the creating and changing
of master records. They control. The account number interval in which the account number must
lie. The screen layout for creating G/L accounts in the company code-specific area. This means
that you can define whether fields require an entry, may have an entry, or are hidden when creating
or changing a master record in the company code-specific area.
Balances in Local Currency Only:
When creating a G/L account in a company code, you can decide whether the transaction figures
should only be kept in the local currency for this account.
You have to set this indicator for clearing accounts you use to clear line items in various currencies
with one local currency amount and without posting any exchange rate differences that may occur.
Do not set this indicator for A/P A/R reconciliation accounts.
You have to set the indicator for the following accounts:
Cash discount clearing accounts
Clearing accounts for goods receipt / invoice receipt
The indicator is usually set for the following balance sheet accounts:
Accounts without open item management in which no foreign currencies are managed
You manage a clearing account for goods received and invoices received. This account is
posted to menually. You post the incoming invoices in an invoice currency and the goods
received in all cases in the local currency.
Defining the Tax Category
- 144 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In tax accounts, you can specify the type of tax on sales/purchases (input or output tax) that can be
posted to the account.
In rare cases, it is useful to assign a certain tax code to an account. You enter the tax code in the
master record in this case. Only this tax code can be used when posting to this account. If a G/L
account is not tax relevant, you may make no specification in this field. For more information on
sales tax and other taxes in your system, see the documentation FI General Topics.
Defining "Posting without Tax Allowed":
If you select this indicator, no tax code needs to be entered when posting to this account. If a tax
code is entered, it is checked according to the tax category for this account.
You use this indicator if taxable and non-taxable postings are to be entered to an account at the
same time. In such a case, you normally set up your own tax code to allow for non-taxable
transactions. However, this is not possible - for example - for tax entry with jurisdiction code, since
no jurisdiction code can be specified for customers abroad. You would then allow postings without
tax codes for the corresponding expense or revenue accounts.
This indicator is not needed for invoice verification postings, since the account assignments are
generally derived from the purchase order. The indicator is therefore not checked by the system for
these postings.
For items with no tax code, no tax information is created, and they are not contained in the tax
report lists.
Define "Reconciliation Account for Account Type":
You use this field to indicate G/L accounts as being reconciliation accounts. For each sub ledger
account, you must keep at least one reconciliation account in the general ledger. When you post to
an account in the sub ledger, the system automatically posts to the corresponding reconciliation
account.
The "Receivables from goods and services" account is an example of a reconciliation account for
customers. Enter Customer in the Reconciliation account for account type field. Enter a Vendor in
this field for a vendor reconciliation account.
Using the reconciliation account procedure, it is possible to create a balance sheet and a profit and
loss statement at any time, since the amounts posted to sub ledger accounts are also posted
automatically in the general ledger.
During regular reconciliation, you check whether the balance of the reconciliation account matches
the balance of the corresponding sub ledger account.
You define reconciliation accounts by specifying in the G/L account master record the account
type (such as fixed assets, vendor or customer) for which the account is to be used. In this way, the
account can only be assigned to accounts in the corresponding sub ledger. You set the assignment
of the sub ledger account to a reconciliation account in the master record of the sub ledger account.
You cannot post to reconciliation accounts menually .
You have created a reconciliation account "Receivables" for accounts receivable. You must specify
the account number of the reconciliation account in the master records of the customer accounts.
- 145 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

The system checks whether the named reconciliation account is permitted for the account type
"customer".
Defining "Open Item Management:
If you set the "Open item management" indicator in the master record for an account, the line items
in this account is marked as open or cleared.
The balance of an account with open item management is equal to the balance of the open items.
General ledger accounts are kept with open item management if you need to check whether there is
an offsetting posting for a given business transaction.
You should use open item management for bank clearing accounts, clearing accounts for goods
receipt/invoice receipt, and salary clearing accounts.
Bank accounts, however, do not use open item management.
If you subsequently define open item management for a G/L account, this entry only applies to the
items which are posted afterwards. At the date of the change, the account must display a zero
balance.
Also, when canceling this indicator, the balance must be zero. You therefore have to clear the
remaining open items before making the change in the master record.
Defining "Line Item Display":
If you set the "Line item display" indicator in the master record for an account, all line items that
have been posted to this account are displayed if they have not been archived.
You use line item display to display the document line items from the account. For line item
display, the system lists all the line items for an account.
For accounts with line item display, the system uses special indices to define the link between the
account and the document. For accounts with many transactions, a corresponding number of
indices must be defined and read for line item display. This means that when posting items to such
accounts and displaying line items, additional storage space and system time are required.
Therefore, you should not use line item display for the following accounts:

Reconciliation accounts (detailed information is contained in the sub ledger)


Sales revenue accounts (detailed information in the Sales and Distribution application
module)
Material accounts (detailed information in the "Materials Management" application
module)
Tax accounts (detailed information is not needed since tax data is contained and checked in
the document).

Defining the Field Status Group:


You use this field to define which fields are displayed when you post accounting transactions to a
G/L account. A field may have one of the following statuses:
hidden (suppressed)
Entry required (required field)
Ready for input (optional field)
- 146 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Creation of Zero Balance GL account


PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger Master Records G/L
Accounts Individual Processing FS00 - Centrally.
Transaction Code: FS00

In the above screen enter G/L Account no, Company Code and click on create

- 147 -

button.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen with first tab Type/Description give required parameters and go to tab
Control Data

In the above screen maintain required parameters and go to another tab Create/Bank/Interest

In above maintain parameters.

- 148 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Click on save button

I.G.REDDY

to save the activity and go back

to SPRO screen.

Define Zero-Balance Clearing Account

In the standard system, you can balance each business area to zero by means of adjustment
postings.
You can use the balance sheet adjustment to do this. When you post a document, the system checks
the business area balance and if this is not zero it marks this document for the balance sheet
adjustment. Program SAPF180A reads the marked documents, calculates the adjustment postings
required, and updates these in its own database tables. A second program, SAPF180, reads the
adjustment posting tables and on this basis posts the accounting documents required.
The adjustment postings are posted to a clearing account. This account fulfills the function of a
receivable or payable from a business area against all other business areas.

The balance sheet adjustment generates summarized transfer postings to the clearing
account.

You can run a balance sheet adjustment as often as you require.

You cannot however run the balance sheet adjustment without first activating the business
area balance sheets for the company code in question.

You can display the calculated adjustment postings for each individual document from the
document display.

PATH: PROFinancial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Business


Transactions Document Splitting Define Zero-Balance Clearing Account.
Database Table: T8G30B
Click on

(IMG Activity), it will display the following window.

Select the line and double click on Accounts under Dialog Structure.

- 149 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

The above small window will display so enter your chart of accounts and pres enter or click on
continue button.
It will take u to another screen there click on

button.

Use this F4 function


to assign GL account

In the above by using F4 function assign Zero Balance GL account which you created.
Click on save button

to save the activity and go back

- 150 -

to SPRO screen.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 151 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Creation of SBI Main Bank GL account


PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger Master Records G/L
Accounts Individual Processing FS00 - Centrally.
Transaction Code: FS00

In the above screen enter G/L Account number, Company Code and pres Create button

After entering above parameters go to next tab Control Data

- 152 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

After entering above parameters go to next tab Create/Bank/Interest

Click on save button

to save the activity

Creation of SBI Cheque Deposit GL account

- 153 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Enter new G/L Account number in G/L Account field and pres create button .

Specify the parameters as the following screen:

After entering above parameters go to next tab Control Data

- 154 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

After entering above parameters go to next tab Create/Bank/Interest

Click on save button

to save the activity

Creation of SBI Cheque Issue GL account


- 155 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Enter new G/L Account number in G/L Account field and pres create button .

Specify the parameters as the following screen:

After entering above parameters go to next tab Control Data

- 156 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

After entering above parameters go to next tab Create/Bank/Interest

Click on save button

to save the activity

- 157 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Define House Banks


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Bank Accounting Bank AccountsFiscal
Define House Banks
Transaction code: FI12
Database Table: T012, T012D, T012K, T012T
Click on

(IMG Activity), it will take to another screen. Here pres on

Enter your company code and pres enter key or click on continue key.
It will take u to another screen there click on

After giving above parameters click on

button.

- 158 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above window give complete address details and pres enter or pres on continue button.
Now save the screen.

Double click on Bank Accounts under Dialog Structure. It will take you to another screen there
click on

Click on this button for


next entry

Click on this F4
function to select GL
account

- 159 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen give all the required specifications. Click on F2 function of G/L field to assign
relevant GL account which we already created and click on next button for next entry.

Click on this button for


next entry

Click on this F4
function to select GL
account

In the above screen give all the required specifications. Click on F2 function of G/L field to assign
relevant GL account which we already created and click on next button for next entry.

Click on this F4
function to select GL
account

In the above screen give all the required specifications. Click on F2 function of G/L field to assign
relevant GL account which we already created.
Click on save button

to save the activity and go back

- 160 -

to SPRO screen.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Define Number Ranges for Checks


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable
Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment
Media Check Management Define Number Ranges for Checks.
Transaction code: FCHI

Click on

(IMG Activity),

Click on this
change button

In the above screen specify above 3 parameters and pres on Change button
It will take you to another screen now click on this create button
Create Lotwindow:

. So it will display following

Pres enter key or click continue button and again now click on this create button

- 161 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Pres enter key or click continue button so the entries will insert to main window.
Click on save button to save the activity and go back to SPRO screen.

Assign House Bank details to relevant GL Accounts


PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger Master Records G/L
Accounts Individual Processing FS00 - Centrally.
Transaction Code: FS00
Enter the SBI main bank GL account number in G/L account field and click on Edit button

Go to Create/Bank/interest tab. As in following screen assign House Bank details.

- 162 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Save the screen.


Enter the sbi cheque deposit a/c GL account number in G/L account field and click on Edit
button

Go to Create/Bank/interest tab. As in following screen assign House Bank details.

- 163 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Save the screen.


Enter the sbi cheque issue a/c GL account number in G/L account field and click on Edit
button

Go to Create/Bank/interest tab. As in following screen assign House Bank details.

- 164 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

Click on save button

I.G.REDDY

to save the activity and go back

- 165 -

to SPRO screen.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Creation of Vendors (Sundry Creditors) Reconciliation Account


PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger Master Records G/L
Accounts Individual Processing FS00 - Centrally.
Transaction Code: FS00
Enter G/L Account number, Company Code and pres on Create Button

The following screen will appear:

Enter the above parameters.

Select next tab Control Data


- 166 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Enter the above parameters.


Select next tab Create/Bank/Interest

Enter the above parameters:


Click on save button

to save the activity.

- 167 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Creation of Customers (Sundry Debtors) Reconciliation Account


PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger Master Records G/L
Accounts Individual Processing FS00 - Centrally.
Transaction Code: FS00
Enter G/L Account number, Company Code and pres on Create Button

The following screen will appears:

After entering above parameters go to next tab Control Data

- 168 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

After entering above parameters go to next tab Create/Bank/Interest

Click on save button

to save the activity and go back to SPRO screen.

- 169 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 170 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Creation of Customer Master Record


PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting Accounts Receivable Master Records
Maintain Centrally XD01 Create.
Transaction Code: XD01
Database tables: KNA1, KNB1, KNB5, KNVP, KNVV, KNVD

When you enter into the transaction it will display the following box.

Maintain the above parameters and pres enter key or click on continue button.

- 171 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In above screen under Address tab we maintain full address details.


Now go to another tab Payment Transactions

In the above screen maintain customer bank details.


- 172 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Now click

I.G.REDDY

button at the top of window.

It will display company code related tabs as follow:

Click on F4 function to
assign GL account

In the above screen under Account Management tab assign Customer Reconciliation GL
Account which we created and maintain parameters as above.
Now click on

button so it will display sales area related tabs as follow:

Under Sales tab:


- 173 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Maintain all above parameters under Sales tab.


Go to Shipping tab and maintain parameters as follow:

In the above screen under shipping tab after maintaining parameters go to Billing Documents
tab
- 174 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Now under this tab maintain above parameters.


Click on save button

to save the activity

Once u click on save button it display the following information and it contain the customer
number.

To go back

to SPRO screen.

- 175 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Creating Vendor Master Record


PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting Accounts Payable Master Records Maintain
Centrally XK01 Create.
Transaction code: XK01
Database Tables: LFA1, LFB1, LFM1, LFM2, LFBK, LFB6
When you enter into the transaction it will display the following window.

Maintain above parameters and pres enter key so it will take to another screen.

- 176 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

After entering above parameters pres on enter button two times so it will take to another screen

In above screen we maintain the vendor bank details. Now pres enter button so it will take to
another screen:

- 177 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In above screen assign vendor reconciliation Account and other parameters and pres enter button 3
times so it will take to another screen.

- 178 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

After entering above parameters just pres enter 2 times so it will display following window:

Click on YES button so your vendor will be created.

It will display the above message at the bottom of the screen with vendor number.

- 179 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 180 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 181 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

NOTE: Before start posting create all G/L accounts in your company code as I given the
table at the end of this book.
G/L Posting F-02
PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingGeneral LedgerPostingF-02 - General Posting
Transaction code: F-02
In the following entry we are going to post is an G/L related Office Rent paid. For this the
normal G/L entry is:
Rent/Rats A/C Dr 25000/SBI Cheque issue A/C

25000/-

It will display the following screen:

In the above screen:


1) Document Date
2) Posting date
3) Type
4) Company Code
5) Period
6) Currency/Rate
7) PstKy
8) Account

: The date is when transaction is performed


: The date is you are posting this entry or document
: Document Type
: In which Company code this Document is being raised
: In which month this Document is being raised
: Document Currency
: Posting key of 1st line item
: Debit G/L Account Number

In the above screen maintain required parameters and pres enter button.
So it will take you to following screen:

- 182 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen:


1) Amount
: Document Amount
2) Text
: Description of the document
3) PstKy
: G/L Credit Posting Key
4) Account
: Credit G/L Account
Now click on

button so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen maintain all parameters and pres enter button it will display the following
screen:
- 183 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen give * symbol in Amount Coolum and + symbol in Text Coolum
and pres enter button so it copy the values and Text from previous screen.

No go to Menu bar Document - Simulate so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen you can watch the entry.


To post the entry either click on save button or go to Menu bar Document - Post
While posting it will gives you the following message.

In the message it gives Document number for your entry from number interval which you had
given to SA document type.
- 184 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Now back to easy access screen.

I.G.REDDY

Report 1 - Display/Change Line Items


Note: The above entry will get update with all ledgers like Leading ledger and Non-Leading
ledger. This you can
view in following 3 reports.
PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger Account FBL3N Display/Change Line Items
Transaction Code: FBL3N
By the above transaction code it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter you company code, select radio button All Items and click on
Executive button. So it will display the following report.

- 185 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

View it and back to easy access screen.


Report 2 - FAGLB03 - Display Balances (New)
Note: The above entry will get update with all ledgers like Leading ledger and Non-Leading
ledger. This you can
view in following 3 reports.
PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger Account FAGLB03 - Display
Balances (New)
Transaction Code: FAGLB03
By the above transaction code it will display the following screen:

- 186 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY
2. Click on this
Multiple
Selection button

5. Click on
this executive
button
1. Click on this button and select your
Non-Leading ledger

3. Select your G/L accounts from


which you want to draw reports

4. Click on this executive


button

In the above screen select G/L Accounts for which you want to draw the report and executive the
report so it will show the following report: (Follow the steps as I shown above boxes)

Now double click on above Debit, Credit, Balance amounts, so it will show detail report as follow:
(I showen only Balance one)

- 187 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Back to easy screen.


Note: The above report is shown on Z2 Non-Leading Ledger. Now you can change the NonLeading Ledger to
another (Z1) and draw the report

Report 3 - FAGLL03 - Display/Change Items (New)


Note: The above entry will get update with all ledgers like Leading ledger and Non-Leading
ledger. This you can
view in following 3 reports.
PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger Account FAGLL03 Display/Change Items (New)
Transaction Code: FAGLL03
By the above transaction code it will display the following screen:

- 188 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY
2. Select the
G/Ls as you
required

4. Select
executive
button
1. Change the ledger as
you required

3. Select this
Radio Button

In the above screen select the Non-Leading ledger, G/L accounts and executive the activity. So it
will show the following screen:

View the above report and back to easy access screen.

- 189 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
FB01L - Enter General Posting for Ledger Group

I.G.REDDY

PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingGeneral LedgerPostingFB01L - Enter General


Posting for Ledger Group
Transaction Code: FB01L
Here we are posting to a Non-Leading Ledger that is (X2)
Here we are posting a Telephone expenses paid. For that the following entry will arise:
Telephone expenses a/c Dr 44454/SBI Cheque Issue a/c 44454/Enter into the above transaction:

Enter you Non-Leading


Ledger

In the above screen maintain the Document date, Document Type (SA), Company code, Posting
date, Currency/Rate, Ledger Grp, PstKy (Posting Key), Account (Your Telephone Expenses G/L
a/c number as you created).
Once you maintain the above parameters pres enter button so it will display the next screen as
below:

- 190 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen give amount for debit item, enter Text, posting key (PstKy) and Cash in hand
G/L a/c number in Account field for credit entry.
Now pres on
button, so it will display the following screen:

NOTE: In the above screen enter Cost Center, Profit Center if create only, if dont create
them you can leave blank those fields
In the above screen enter Business area, Cot Center, Profit Center, Segment, Functional Area and
pres enter button so it display the following screen:

- 191 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter * symbol to Amount field and + symbol to Text field.

No go to Menu bar Document - Simulate so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen you can watch the entry.


To post the entry either click on save button or go to Menu bar Document - Post
While posting it will gives you the following message.

In the message it gives Document number for your entry from number interval which you had
given to SA document type.
Now back to easy access screen.
To view reports go to following transaction:
Report 1: FBL3N
Report 2: FAGLB03
Report 3: FAGLL03
Report 4: FS10N
Executive above reports with Leading and Non-Leading Ledgers (X1, X2)

- 192 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Posting G/L Entry with Enjoy Transaction

I.G.REDDY

PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingGeneral LedgerPostingFB50 - Enter G/L


Account Document
Transaction Code: FB50
By this transaction you can post similar nature multiple transactions at a time.
With the above transaction the following screen will display:

To simulate click on
this Button

NOTE: In the above screen enter Cost Center, Profit Center if create only, if dont create
them you can leave blank those fields
In the above screen you enter multiple debits and a credit and simulate the screen.

In the above screen you can view simulated entry. Now click on save the button to save the entry.

- 193 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

.
After you save the screen it displays the above information with Document number.
Back to easy access screen.
To view report goes to following transaction:
Report 1: FBL3N
Report 2: FAGLB03
Report 3: FAGLL03
Report 4: FS10N
Executive above reports with Leading and Non-Leading Ledgers (X1, X2)
Enter G/L Account Document for Ledger Group
PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingGeneral LedgerPosting FB50L - Enter G/L
Account Document for Ledger Group
Transaction Code: FB50L
By this transaction you can post similar nature multiple transactions at a time.
With the above transaction the following screen will display:

Enter your
Non-Leading
Ledger

NOTE: In the above screen enter Cost Center, Profit Center if create only, if dont create
them you can leave blank those fields

In the above screen you enter multiple debits and a credit and simulate the screen.
- 194 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen you can view simulated entry. Now click on save the button to save the entry.

After you save the screen it displays the above information with Document number.
Back to easy access screen.
To view report goes to following transaction:
Report 1: FBL3N
Report 2: FAGLB03
Report 3: FAGLL03
Report 4: FS10N
Executive above reports with Leading and Non-Leading Ledgers (X1, X2)

- 195 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Posting Customer Credit Invoice

I.G.REDDY

PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingAccounts ReceivableDocument EntryF-22 Invoice General


Transaction code: F-22
With above transaction the following screen appears:

In the above screen enter Document Date, Posting Date, Document Type, Company Code,
Currency/Rate, Pstky (Posting Key) and Account (Customer number).
After above parameters click on enter button so it display another screen as below:

- 196 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
In the above screen enter Amount of invoice, Bus.Area (business area), Text, Pstky (Posting Key)
and Account (Sales account number).
Once you maintain above all parameters click on enter button, so it display the following screen:

In the above screen give * to amount field and give + to Text so it will copy previous
screendata to this screen
Now click on
button so it will display the following screen:

NOTE: In the above screen enter Cost Center, Profit Center if create only, if dont create
them you can leave blank those fields
- 197 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen maintain required parameters as I showen and pres enter button.
Now go to Menu bar (Document + Simulate)

Now go to Menu bar Document + Post, so it will post the transaction and give following
message:

In the above message is give document number for above transaction from the interval which we
maintain for the Document type DR.
Back to easy access screen.
Customer Reports
PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting Accounts Receivable Account FBL5N Display/Change Line Items
Transaction code: FBL5N - Display/Change Line Items
By the above transaction code the following screen displays:

- 198 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen select your customer, company code, land select radio button All items, and
click on Executive button

so it will display the below screen:

This red button


indicates Open Items

In the above screen it shows report as we posted credit invoice.


The red symbol indicates Open Item that means the invoice is raise on credit based but not
cleared (not yet paid).

- 199 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Standard Clearing Credit Customer Invoice

I.G.REDDY

PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting Accounts Receivable Document Entry F-28


- Incoming Payments
Transaction code: F-2
By the above transaction code it display following screen:

In the above screen:


Enter Document Date, Posting Date

Enter Document type, Company code

Enter Posting Period, Currency/Rate

Enter Account under Bank Data (in this field give SBI Cheque Deposit G/L Account
Number)

Enter Amount (In this Field Enter the Credit Invoice Amount which you want to clear)

Enter Busniess Area, Profit Center

Enter Account under Open item Selection (In This field Enter Your Customer Number
from whom you received amount)

Once you enter above all parameters pres on enter button so it will display the following screen:
.

- 200 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Double click on this amount so it


will de-activate

To clear this
field should
be zero

In the above screen under Account items you be having many open items (In Blue color). We
have do deselect all other open items (To Deselect items just Double click on other items one by
one so they convert into black color) except one which you are going to clear now.
Always after maingk changer Non Assigned field should be Zero.
Not go to Menu bar Document Simulate, so it display the following screen:

- 201 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
To post the entry go to Menu bar Document - Post, so it post the entry and shows the following
message:

In the above screen it gives the Clearing document number form DZ document type.
Back to easy access screen:
Reports
PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting Accounts Receivable Account FBL5N Display/Change Line Items
Transaction code: FBL5N - Display/Change Line Items
By the above transaction code the following screen displays:

In the above screen select your customer, company code, land select radio button All items, and
click on Executive button

so it will display the below screen:

This is your cleared


invoice

- 202 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen you can view the cleared item.


Back to easy access screen.

- 203 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Clearing Open Item Partial Payment

I.G.REDDY

Note: post one open item with transaction code: F-22 (for example I had an open item worth
Rs.150000 /-)
PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting Accounts Receivable Document Entry F-28
- Incoming Payments
Transaction code: F-28
By the above transaction code it display following screen:
Note: In this transaction I am clear 45000 as Partial Payment.

In the above screen maintain all parameters as required as above and pres enter button so it will
display the following screen:

- 204 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY
1. Click on this tab
2. Double click on this field. It will
show amount we receiving.

In the above screen first go to Partial Pmt tab.


Under Account Items if you have multiple items deselect all other line items except one
which you want to clear.
Under Payment amount it will display full invoice amount so double click on that
amount, now automatically it will changes the amount to actual Partial amount which we
are suppose to clear today.
Not Assigned field will be zero now.

Not go to Menu bar Document Simulate, so it displays the following screen:

To post the entry go to Menu bar Document - Post, so it post the entry and shows the following
message:

In the above screen it gives the Clearing document number form DZ document type.
Back to easy access screen:
- 205 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Reports

I.G.REDDY

PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting Accounts Receivable Account FBL5N Display/Change Line Items
Transaction code: FBL5N - Display/Change Line Items
By the above transaction code the following screen displays:

In the above screen select your customer, company code, land select radio button All items, and
click on Executive button

so it will display the below screen:

In the above screen you can view the cleared item of Rs.45,000/- as credit item (in SAP the credit
entries will be shown by - symbol at the end of amount for example Rs.45000-)
Till you clear the balance amount those line items wont be convert to green symbol.
- 206 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Note: clear the balance amount in normal/Standard clearing and view the report
Back to easy access screen.

- 207 -

I.G.REDDY

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Clearing Open Item Residual Payment

I.G.REDDY

Note: post one open item with transaction code: F-22 (for example I had an open item worth
Rs.100000 /-)
PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting Accounts Receivable Document Entry F-28
- Incoming Payments
Transaction code: F-28
Note: In this transaction I am clear Rs.60000/- as Partial Payment.
By the above transaction code it display following screen:

In the above screen maintain app required parameters as I shown above and click on enter button
so it will display the following screen:

1. Select this tab (Residual Items)


2. Double click on this button so
it will show only balance to be
received amount

- 208 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen first go to Res.items tab.


Under Account Items if you have multiple items deselect all other line items except one
which you want to clear.
Under Payment amount it will display full invoice amount so double click on that
amount, now automatically it will changes the amount to actual Partial amount which we
are suppose to clear today.
Not Assigned field will be zero now.

Not go to Menu bar Document Simulate, so it displays the following screen:

To post the entry go to Menu bar Document - Post, so it post the entry and shows the following
message:

In the above screen it gives the Clearing document number form DZ document type.
Back to easy access screen.

Reports
PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting Accounts Receivable Account FBL5N Display/Change Line Items
Transaction code: FBL5N - Display/Change Line Items
By the above transaction code the following screen displays:

- 209 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen select your customer, company code, land select radio button All items, and
click on Executive button

so it will display the below screen:

In the above screen it will we can view it has cleared the whole credit invoice entry of Rs.100000
and showes only balance of Rs.40000/- only.
It wont show the cleared amount of Rs.60000/- in the report that we have to mention in text only.
Now clear the balance in normal/Standard clearing of Rs.40000/- and view the entry in report.
Back to easy access screen.

- 210 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Posting Vendor Credit Invoice

I.G.REDDY

PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingAccounts PayableDocument EntryF-43 Invoice General


Transaction Code: F-43
With above transaction code it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter Document Date, Document type (KR), Company code, Posting Date,
Currency/Rate, PstKy (Posting key), Account (Vendor number).
After you enter above parameters pres on enter button so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter Amount (Invoice Amount), text for credit information,
- 211 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
Enter PstKy (Debit G/L posting key), Account (Purchases G/L account number).
Once you enter the above parameters pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen for Amount field enter * symbol and for Text field enter + symbol and
pres enter button and click on

button so it will display the following scereen:

In the above screen enter those parameters and click on enter button.
Now go to Menu bar Document + simulate, it will display the following screen:
- 212 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen you can view the G/L entry. Now go to Menu Bar Document + Post so it will
post the entry and give the following message.

In the above message it displays the Document number for the above entry from KR number range.
Back to easy access screen.

Report on Vendor Line Items


PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingAccounts PayableAccountFBL1N Display/Change Line Items.
Transaction Code: FBL1N
By above transaction code the following screen display:
Hear you can select specific
vendor also

- 213 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen select radio button All items and click on
display the following screen:

or cick F8 button so it will

View line items and back to easy access screen.

Standard Vendor Line Item Clearing


PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingAccounts PayableDocument Entry Outgoing
PaymentF-53 Post.
Transaction Code: F-53
By above transaction code the following screen displays:

- 214 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In above screen maintain Document date, Posting date, Document type, Company code, Period,
Currency/Rate, under Bank date maintain Account (SBI Cheque issue G/L a/c number), Amount
(Amount which you are clearing now), text, under Open Item Selection maintain Account (give
your Vendor number) and pres enter button, so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen under Standard tab.


Under Account Items if you have multiple items deselect all other line items except one
which you want to clear.
Not Assigned field will be zero now.

Not go to Menu bar Document Simulate, so it displays the following screen:


- 215 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

To post the entries go to Menu bar Document - Post, so it post the entry and shows the following
message:

In the above message it gives an Vendor Clearing document number for KZ document number.
Back to easy access screen.

Report with Standard Vendor Credit Invoice Clearing


PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingAccounts PayableAccountFBL1N Display/Change Line Items.
Transaction Code: FBL1N
By above transaction code the following screen display:
Hear you can select specific
vendor also

- 216 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen select radio button All items and click on
display the following screen:

or cick F8 button so it will

In the above screen you can view cleared credit invoice.


Back to easy access screen.
Partial Payment Clearing to Vendor Line Item
PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingAccounts PayableDocument Entry Outgoing
PaymentF-53 Post.
Transaction Code: F-53
Note: for this clearing post one Vendor Open Item for Rs.300000/By above transaction code the following screen displays:

- 217 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In above screen maintain Document date, Posting date, Document type, Company code, Period,
Currency/Rate, under Bank date maintain Account (SBI Cheque issue G/L a/c number), Amount
(Amount which you are clearing now), text, under Open Item Selection maintain Account (give
your Vendor number) and pres enter button, so it will display the following screen:

Double click on this so


it will display the
clearing amount

Deselect these lint


items

In the above screen under Partial Pmt tab.


Under Account Items if you have multiple items, deselect all other line items except one
which you want to clear.
- 218 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
Under Payment amount it will display full invoice amount so double click on that
amount, now automatically it will changes the amount to actual Partial amount which we
are suppose to clear today.
Not Assigned field will be zero now.
Not go to Menu bar Document Simulate, so it displays the following screen:

To post the entries go to Menu bar Document - Post, so it post the entry and shows the following
message:

In the above message it gives a Vendor Clearing document number for KZ document number.
Back to easy access screen.
Report with Standard Vendor Credit Invoice Clearing
PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingAccounts PayableAccountFBL1N Display/Change Line Items.
Transaction Code: FBL1N
By above transaction code the following screen display:
Hear you can select specific
vendor also

- 219 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen select radio button All items and click on
display the following screen:

or cick F8 button so it will

In the above screen we can view Rs.300000- /- with Document type KR and Rs.175000/- with
Document Type KZ.
Above it shows against Rs.300000- - invoice we cleared Rs.175000/-.but booth line items lies at
one place till we clear rest of the payment.
With Standard clearing clear the rest of the amount (That is Rs.1250000/-) also then total invoice
related line items will be cleared, View the report again after standard clearing.
Back to easy access screen.
- 220 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Residual Payment Clearing to Vendor Line Item


PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingAccounts PayableDocument Entry Outgoing
PaymentF-53 Post.
Transaction Code: F-53
Note: for this clearing post one Vendor Open Item for Rs.200000/By above transaction code the following screen displays:

In above screen maintain Document date, Posting date, Document type, Company code, Period,
Currency/Rate, under Bank date maintain Account (SBI Cheque issue G/L a/c number), Amount
(Amount which you are clearing now), text, under Open Item Selection maintain Account (give
your Vendor number) and pres enter button, so it will display the following screen;

- 221 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen under Residual item tab.


Under Account Items if you have multiple items, deselect all other line items except one
which you want to clear.
Under Payment amount it will display blank field against the invoice which we are
clearing now, so double click on that amount, now automatically it will changes the amount
to actual Partial amount which we are suppose to clear today.
Not Assigned field will be zero now.

Not go to Menu bar Document Simulate, so it displays the following screen:

To post the entries go to Menu bar Document - Post, so it post the entry and shows the following
message:
- 222 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above message it gives a Vendor Clearing document number for KZ document number.
Back to easy access screen.

Report with Standard Vendor Credit Invoice Clearing


PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingAccounts PayableAccountFBL1N Display/Change Line Items.
Transaction Code: FBL1N
By above transaction code the following screen display:
Hear you can select specific
vendor also

In the above screen select radio button All items and click on
display the following screen:

- 223 -

or click F8 button so it will

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen you can view the total invoice will be cleared and it shows only the outstanding
amount in open item.
Clear the balance amount in standard payment methods and view the report.
Back to easy access screen

- 224 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 225 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY
Parking Documents

These documents are used to enter or store incomplete documents in SAP. These documents can be
complete or checked and then post at a later date. Parked document information wont be update
with any of G/L till is post again.
You can park data relating to customers, vendors, G/L accounts, and asset accounts. There is an
additional fast entry function for G/L accounts. For assets, you can only enter acquisitions.
Furthermore, you can park tax information and special sales, but you cannot park special sales for
bills of exchange or down payments.
SAP provides two transactions for document parking: the standard transaction and the single
screen transaction (Enjoy).
You can also check the document for completeness. For example, the system checks whether the
document balance is zero and whether entries have been made in all required entry fields (such as
posting key and account number).
The authorization checks performed for document parking are basically the same as those
performed for standard document entry and processing. The assignment of authorizations enables
the system to differentiate between users who can only park documents and those who can park
and post documents.
No tolerance checks are performed. The system checks for erroneous entries. For example, you
cannot enter an undefined business area. You can use account assignment models when parking
documents, but not reference documents.

PATH: AccountingFinancial Accounting General Ledger PostingF-02 - General Posting


Transaction Code: F-02
By above transaction code it will display the following screen,
In the following transaction we are trying post Machinery Maintains exp

In the above screen give all information as I shown.


Posting key is 40 (G/L Debit) and account is Machine maintains exp G/L.
Now pres enter button so it will display the following screen:
- 226 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen I has provided debit amount as 125000/- and cost center but I dont have
credit information now so I am parking this entry in the middle as below:
Now go to menu bar Document + Park it will display the following screen:

Above document has been parked with Document number 100010.


Posting Parked Document
PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger Document Parked
Documents FBV0 - Post/Delete
Transaction Code: FBV0
By above transaction code it will display the following screen,

- 227 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter Company Code, Parked Document Number, Fiscal Year and pres enter
button so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen it display the debit item as I parked with that information now I am giving
credit information like document header text, posting key, account.
Provide information to above screen and pres enter button it will display the following screen:

In the above screen give * to a mount Coolum and pres enter button
Go to menu bar Document + Post it will display the following screen with information as below:
- 228 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen it shows the information saying parked document was posted.
Now view report the database and G/Ls are updated.
Sample Document
Sample document is a template for original accounting document. Sample documents as reference
document entered specifically for posting with sample documents. A sample document does not
update G/Ls
These documents hold separate number range that is X2 this is assigned to number range under
your company code.
During document entry, you can have data from another document defaulted. The items from this
reference document can be:

Transferred without changes

Used for reverse postings

Changed

Omitted

Enhanced

In contrast to an accounting document, sample documents do not update transaction figures. They
serve merely as data sources for an accounting document. Their advantage is that you can change
or enhance them. You therefore use a sample document rather than an accounting document if you
need a reference document for which you want to define the layout yourself.
You use a sample document as a reference document in which assignment to more than one cost
center is defined. If you want to assign to other cost centers, you can change the values in the
sample document. If you use an accounting document as a reference document, you cannot make
these changes because you also have to change the account assignments relevant for accounting.

- 229 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
You enter sample documents with a special function to ensure that these documents cannot be
accidentally posted as accounting documents.
If you store a sample document, the system automatically assigns a number to this special
document. To do this, the system uses the number interval X2. This number range may only be
used by the system. You cannot assign it to any document type. You have to set up this number
range in all the company codes where sample documents are used. You have to use key X2 for this
number range.
Define Number Range for Sample Document
PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
DocumentDocument Number RangesDocuments in Entry ViewDefine Document Number
Ranges for Entry View.
Transaction Code: FBN1

In the above screen enter your company code and click on change intervals button.
It will display the following screen.
In the displayed screen click on

it will display following window:

In the above window enter X2, year, From Number, and To number interval and click on enter
button.
Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.
- 230 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Creation of Sample Document

I.G.REDDY

PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingGeneral LedgerPostingReference


DocumentsF-01 - Sample Document
Transaction Code: F-01
In this example I am creating sample document for G/L entry:
Marketing Expenses G/L a/c Dr 150000/To SBI Cheque issue G/L
150000/By above transaction it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter:


Document Date, Posting Dates, Document Type, Company Code, Currency, PstKy(Posting
Key as Debit G/L 40), and Account (Marketing Expenses G/L number)
After entering above all information pres enter it will display the following screen:

- 231 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter:


Amount(Amount for debit line item), text, PstKy(Credit posting key as 50), Account(Credit
G/L SBI cheque issue number)
After providing all above information pres enter button so it will display the following screen

In the above screen enter * to amount, + to text fields and pres enter so it will copy the
information from previous screen.
Not go to menu bar Document + post. It will post it entry

- 232 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
After post it will issue an message with Sample Document number as above.
Back to easy access screen.

I.G.REDDY

To view or change Sample Document


PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingGeneral LedgerDocumentReference
DocumentsSample DocumentFBM2 Change
By above transaction it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter your Sample document number which you want to post now to
Document Number field and enter information to Company code, Fiscal Year
Pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

In above screen either click on either of the line items and make changes if need and save the
document.
Posting Sample Document
PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger Posting F-02 - General
Posting
- 233 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

By above transaction it will display the following screen:

In the above screen just click on Post with reference button it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter your Sample document number which you want to post now to
Document Number field and enter information to Company code, Fiscal Year
Pres enter button two times so it will display the following screen:

- 234 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen go to menu bar Documents + Post it will post the entry and display the
following information message.

.
The above message shows document posted number.
(NOTE: like above any number of time you can post the same document.)
Delete Sample Document
PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger Document Reference
Documents Sample Document F.57 Delete
Transaction Code: F.57
By above transaction it will display the following screen:

- 235 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter your Company code, Document Number (Sample Document Number of
which you want to delete), Fiscal year, Reference docyment type.
Deflat the check box Test Run
Now click on execute button so it will display the following window:

In the above window click on Yes button.

At final it will display the above information window about deleted documents details.

- 236 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Recurring Entries
Definition
Periodically recurring entries posted by the recurring entries program based on recurring entry
documents. This process is comparable to the standing order you give to your bank to deduct your
rent, premium payments, or loan repayments.
Recurring entries are business transactions that are repeated regularly, such as rent or insurance.
The following data never changes in recurring entries:

Posting key

Account

Amounts

You enter this recurring data in a recurring entry original document. This document does not
update the transaction figures. The recurring entry program uses it as a basis for creating
accounting documents.
The system uses the recurring entry original document that you enter as a reference. It is not an
accounting document and therefore does not affect the account balance.
In the recurring entry document, you define when a posting is to be created with this document.
You have two options for scheduling. Postings can be made periodically or on a specific date:

For periodic postings, specify the first and last day of execution, as well as the interval in
months.

If you want to specify certain dates, enter a run schedule in the recurring entry original
document.

Recurring Document has separate number range that is X1 to this number range we need to
assign number interval to you company code.

Define Number Range for Sample Document


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
DocumentDocument Number RangesDocuments in Entry ViewDefine Document Number
Ranges for Entry View.
Transaction Code: FBN1

- 237 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter your company code and click on change intervals button.
It will display the following screen.
In the displayed screen click on

it will display following window:

In the above screen we gave X1 as number range and interval for present fiscal year.
Save the activity and back to easy access screen.
Creation of Recurring Document
PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger Posting Reference
Documents FBD1 - Recurring Document
Transaction code: FBD1
By the above transaction it will display the following screen:
In this example I am posting following entry:

Office rent a/c Dr


5000/Salary a/c
Dr
6000/Land Lease a/c
Dr
7000/Audit Fee a/c Dr
8000/To SBI cheque issue a/c

26000/-

- 238 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter values:


Company code
First run on (From which date the run schedule start)
Last run on (On which date the run schedule ends)
Interval in months
Run date (On which date the entry has to be run)
Pstky (Debit posting key)
Account (Debit G/L Account number)
Enter all above parameters and click on enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 239 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen I entered amount for previous debit item, cost center (if CO is active and Cost
Centers are created)
Another debit posting key and another G/L a/c number for next line item and click on enter button
so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen I entered amount for previous debit item, cost center (if CO is active and Cost
Centers are created)
Another debit posting key and another G/L a/c number for next line item and click on enter button
so it will display the following screen:

- 240 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen I entered amount for previous debit item, cost center (if CO is active and Cost
Centers are created)
Another debit posting key and another G/L a/c number for next line item and click on enter button
so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen I entered amount for previous debit item, cost center (if CO is active and Cost
Centers are created)

- 241 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
Credit posting key and Credit G/L a/c number for next line item and click on enter button so it will
display the following screen:

In the above screen put * symbol to amount field and + symbol to Text field and pres enter
button.
Now go to menu bar Document + post it will display the following message.

In the above message it shows the Recurring document number


Back to easy access screen.
Creation of Run Schedule
PATH: SPRO Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Document Recurring Entries Define Run Schedules
Transaction Code: OBC1
Database table: T054, T054T
By above transaction it will display the following screen click on

- 242 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In above screen enter new Run Schedule name and description.


Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.
Enter Run Dates
PATH: SPRO Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Document Recurring Entries Enter Run Dates
Transaction Code: OBC2
Database table: T054A
By above transaction it will display the following window:

In above window enter Run schedule and pres enter it will display the following screen in it click
on

In the above screen enter the schedule dates to which you want to run the recurring document.
- 243 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

I.G.REDDY

View Recurring Document


PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingGeneral LedgerPeriodic ProcessingRecurring
EntriesF.15 Lists
Transaction Code: F.15
By above transaction it will display the following screen:

Fill the above parameters and click on executive button so it will display the following screen:

Back to easy access screen.

Execute Recurring Document


PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingGeneral LedgerPeriodic ProcessingRecurring
Entries F.14 - Execute
Transaction Code: F.14
By above transaction it will display the following screen:

- 244 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter the parameters like:


Company Code
Document Number
Fiscal Year
Settlement period
Batch Input Session Name
Enter the above parameter and click on Executive button so it will display the following message.

The above message says the Batch input Session was created with name we gave in above screen

To executive the sessions go to menu bar Services + Batch Input + Session it display the
following screen:

- 245 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen we can view your session with your session name, so select that and click on
Process button it will display the following window:

In above window select Display errors only radio button and click Process button. It thee is o
any error s it will executive session and display the following information

In the above window just click on Exit batch input button.


Check you G/L report with Transaction Code: FBL3N

- 246 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 247 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Maintain Terms of Payment (Discount with Customer)

I.G.REDDY

PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts


PayableBusiness TransactionsOutgoing Invoices/Credit MemosMaintain Terms of Payment
Transaction Code: OBB8
Database Table: T052, T052U, TVZB, TVZBT
By above transaction code it will display the following screen, click on

In the above screen enter Payt Terms code to payment term


Sales text description to payment term
Account type either Customer or Vendor flag the check box or booth
Default baseline date either Document date, Posting date, Entry date
Payment terms Discount percentages and No of days.
(NOTE: The above payment term we are doing for customer if we need to create payment
tern to vendor under Account type select Vendor check box and all other process is same)
In the above screen under Payment Terms that means if the customer is paying money in first 12
days he will get 12% of discount, if he pay from 12 days to 20 days from base line date he will get
8% of discount after that he wont get any discount.
Save the activity and back to easy access screen.

- 248 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Assign the Payment term to Customer Master

I.G.REDDY

PATH: Accounting Financial AccountingAccounts ReceivableMaster RecordsMaintain


CentrallyXD02 - Change
Transaction code: XD02

In the above screen enter your company code and customer code and pres enter button so it will
enter in to customer master data.
, it will display the following screen:

Now in the customer master click on

In the above screen under Payment Transactions Tab to Terms of Payment field enter you
payment terms code and save the activity.
Back to easy access screen.

Assign Discount Allowed G/L account to Transaction Key


Transaction code: OBXI
NOTE: Transaction key is SKT
By this transaction code it will display the following box:

- 249 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above box enter your chart of account and click on enter button, it display the following
screen:

In the above screen just click on save button so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter your Discount Allowed G/L account number.
Save the activity and back to easy access screen.

Posting Customer Invoice


PATH: AccountingFinancial Accounting Accounts ReceivableDocument EntryF-22 Invoice General
Transaction Code: F-22
In the following screen:

- 250 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter required information and pres enter so it will display the following screen
as below:

In the above screen we enter invoice amount, posting key, Credit G/L account, but the payment
terms will appear automatically because we assign terms of payment code to customer and the
same customer we taken in the first screen above to raise the invoice.
Now pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 251 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen we enter * to Amount field and + to text field,


button and assign Profit center information and pres enter button.
Click on
Then go to Menu Bar Document + Simulate
The following screen appears:

No to post the entry either click on save button or , go to Man bar Document + post your entry
will be posted.
Clearing Customer Invoice
NOTE: Clearing customer invoice with in 12 days with an 12% of discount
PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingAccounts ReceivableDocument EntryF-28 Incoming Payments
- 252 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Transaction Code: F-28


By the above transaction it will display the following screen:

Give the invoice amount


after the discount

In the above screen maintain all parameters as I shown.


In amount Coolum give after discount amount (In the above example100000*12%/100 = 88000)
Now pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 253 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen deselect all other line items except one which you clearing now.
Go to menu bar Document + Simulate.
It will display the following screen:

.
In the above screen you can view the entry to clearing customer open item with discount.
Now go to menu bar Document + Post, it will post the entry as issue the following message.

Back to easy access screen.


Now view the reports:
FBL5N: Customer Report
FBL3N: G/L Report.

- 254 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 255 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY
TAX ON SALES AND PURCHASES

Tax is calculated from expenses or revenues, which is a base amount. A base amount may include
cash discount or not. If it includes it is a net base amount otherwise it is gross amount. It varies
from country to country. To determine the base amount, whether to include cash discount or not ,
set the indicator in basic settings of taxes on sales/purchases.
You can use the SAP System to manage various types of tax according to the legal requirements of
a country or a region. The Financial Accounting components Accounts Receivable (FI-AR),
Accounts Payable (FI/AP), and General Ledger provides the following comprehensive tax
functions:
Tax calculation: The system calculates tax amounts with or without cash discount based on the
tax
base amount.
Tax posting: The system posts the tax amounts to defined tax accounts.
Adjustments: The system corrects tax amounts, in the case of cash discount or other deductions,
for example.
Tax reporting: You can use the system to create tax returns.
Tax on Sales and Purchases
Taxes on sales and purchases are levied on every sales transaction in accordance with the
principles of VAT. This applies to input and output tax, for example.
Input tax is calculated using the net invoice amount and is charged by the vendor.
Output tax is calculated using the net price of products and is charged to the customer.
Companies can offset input tax against output tax, paying the balance to the tax authorities. Tax
authorities can set a nondeductible portion for input tax which cannot then be claimed from the tax
authorities.
The Accounts Receivable, Accounts Payable, and General Ledger application components support
the calculation and posting of tax as follows:

The tax amount can be determined upon request

The tax amount is checked by the system at document level

The tax amount is posted to the tax accounts automatically

A tax adjustment can be performed automatically, if required, for cash discount postings and
other deductions

These transactions are controlled using Customizing, whereby the following specifications need to
be made:

To determine the tax amount, the system calculates a base amount, the composition of which
varies from country to country. You determine whether the base amount for tax calculation is
- 256 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
to include the specified cash discount amount. This information must be defined for each
company code.
To enter and determine taxes automatically, a tax code is required, which will include the tax
rate prescribed by law.
The tax amount is generally posted automatically. For posting, specify the tax accounts to
which the individual taxes are to be posted.
In a G/L account master record, you can specify whether the account is a tax account, and if so,
which tax type (input tax or output tax) can be posted to the account. For all other G/L
accounts, you can use the master record to specify a tax rate and a tax type, or specify that it is
not tax-relevant.
NOTE: in India the taxes or INPUT TAX (Tax on purchases), OUTPUT TAX (Tax on sales)
INPUT TAX

Excise Duty Paid


CESS Paid
VAT Paid
If the tax is with in the State VAT will be calculated, If the tax is out of
CST Paid
state CST will be calculated

OUTPUT TAX

Excise Duty Payable


CESS Payable
If the tax is with in the State VAT will be calculated, if the tax is
VAT Payable
out of state CST will be calculated
CST Payable

Step 1: Define Condition type


You determine the calculation type for a condition type in Customizing. This determines how the
system calculates prices, taxes, discounts and surcharges for a condition. When setting up
condition records, you can enter a different calculation type than the one in Customizing. At
present all available calculation types are permitted. The field Calculation type can however not
be accessed if this field is left empty. After the data release has been printed, if the field has not
been completed manually, the proposal is automatically taken from Customizing. After this it is no
longer possible to make manual changes.
If you use different calculation types for what are otherwise the same conditions (for example,
percentage, as a fixed amount or quantity-dependent), you do not have to define different condition
types in Customizing. You can set a different calculation type when maintaining the individual
condition records.
Condition Types in the Standard Version of the SAP System
The standard system includes, among many others, the following predefined condition types:
Condition type

Description

PR00

Price
- 257 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
K004
Material discount

I.G.REDDY

K005

Customer-specific material discount

K007

Customer discount

K020

Price group discount

KF00

Freight surcharge (by item)

UTX1

State tax

UTX2

County tax

UTX3

City tax

Condition type Structure:


What calculation the system carries out in that step depends on the following control indicators:

Access sequences
Condition class
Calculation type
Condition category

Access Sequences: An access sequence is a search strategy that the system uses to find valid data
for a particular condition type. It determines the sequence in which the system searches for data.
The access sequence consists of one or more accesses. The sequence of the accesses establishes
which condition records have priority over others. The accesses tell the system where to look first,
second, and so on, until it finds a valid condition record. You specify an access sequence for each
condition type for which you create condition records.
The access sequence enables the system to access the data records in a particular sequence until it
finds a valid price or value
Condition class: This is Preliminary structure of condition types. It determines whether condition
type is Discount or surcharge, Taxes, Prices Etc.
Calculation type: Determines how the system calculates prices, discounts, or surcharges in a
condition. For example, the system can calculate a price as a fixed amount or as a percentage based
on quantity, volume, or weight. The calculation type can be set when generating new condition
records. If this does not happen, the calculation type maintained here is valid for the condition
record.
Condition category: A classification of conditions according to pre-defined categories (for
example, all conditions that relate to freight costs).
PATH: SPRO Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax
on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings Check Calculation Procedure.
Transaction Code: OBYZ

Database Table: T685, T685A, T685T


- 258 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
By the above transaction code it display following screen:

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen double click on Define condition types so it will display another screen so
click on
it will display he following screen:

In the above screen maintain parameters like Condition type, Condition class, Calculation type,
Condition Category and click on

(Next) button.

It will display the following new screen:

- 259 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen maintain parameters like Access sequence, Condition type, Condition class,
Calculation type, Condition Category and click on
It will display the following new screen:

- 260 -

(Next) button.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
In the above screen maintain parameters like Access sequence, Condition type, Condition class,
Calculation type, Condition Category and click on

(Next) button.

It will display the following new screen:

In the above screen maintain parameters like Access sequence, Condition type, Condition class,
Calculation type, Condition Category and click on
It will display the following new screen:

- 261 -

(Next) button.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen maintain parameters like Access sequence, Condition type, Condition class,
Calculation type, Condition Category and click on
(Next) button.
It will display the following new screen:

In the above screen maintain parameters like Access sequence, Condition type, Condition class,
Calculation type, Condition Category and click on
(Next) button.
It will display the following new screen:

- 262 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

the above screen maintain parameters like Access sequence, Condition type, Condition class,
Calculation type, Condition Category and click on
(Next) button.
It will display the following new screen:

The above screen maintain parameters like Access sequence, Condition type, Condition class,
Calculation.
- 263 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Type, Condition Category and click on
It will display the following new screen:

I.G.REDDY
(Next) button.

the above screen maintain parameters like Access sequence, Condition type, Condition class,
Calculation type, Condition Category and click on
(Save) button to save the activity.
Back to SPRO screen.

- 264 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Step 2: Check and Change Settings for Tax Processing


In this activity you make the necessary specifications for posting taxes. In doing this you specify
under a process key the following indicators:
Tax type: Output tax, input tax, additional taxes, or "not tax-relevant" can be specified as the tax
type.
Non deductibility: This is of tax amounts for this, tax amounts are marked as not deductible.
Posting indicator: Here you specify whether the tax amount is posted separately or distributed to
expense or revenue items.
Tax not relevant to cash discount (Not discount relevant): This indicator is set only for Canada.
If you select it, the system does not take into account the corresponding tax amount when
determining the tax base.

PATH: SPRO Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax
on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings Check and Change Settings for Tax Processing
Transaction Code: OBCN
Database Table: T007B, T687, T687T
By the above transaction code it displays following screen, click on
following screen:

it will display he

In the above screen maintain Process, Description, Tax Type, Posting Indicator and click on
(Next) button.
It will display the following new screen:

- 265 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen maintain Process, Description, Tax Type, Posting Indicator and click on
(Next) button.
It will display the following new screen:

In the above screen maintain Process, Description, Tax Type, Posting Indicator and click on
(Next) button.
It will display the following new screen:

In the above screen maintain Process, Description, Tax Type, Posting Indicator and click on
(Next) button.
- 266 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
It will display the following new screen:

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen maintain Process, Description, Tax Type, Posting Indicator and click on
(Next) button.
It will display the following new screen:

In the above screen maintain Process, Description, Tax Type, Posting Indicator and click on
(Next) button.
It will display the following new screen:

In the above screen maintain Process, Description, Tax Type, Posting Indicator and click on
(Next) button.
- 267 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
It will display the following new screen:

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen maintain Process, Description, Tax Type, Posting Indicator and click on
(Save) button, so it save the activity.
Back to SPRO screen.

Step 3: Define Procedure


A calculation procedure is defined for each country, each containing the specifications required to
calculate and post tax on sales/purchases. Each calculation procedure contains several tax types,
which are called condition types in the procedure.
The system defaults condition types when you define a tax code. The condition type (such as input
or output tax) specifies the base amount on which the tax is calculated and the account key that is
used to post the tax. The specifications necessary for calculating and posting tax have been defined
for the condition type and account key.
The calculation procedure determines the amount on which the individual condition types are
calculated. This can be the base amount (total of expense and revenue items) or a subtotal.
Incoming acquisition tax, for example, is not calculated based on the expense or revenue items, but
on the tax amount for outgoing acquisition tax. The column Fr.level determines the amount on
which tax is calculated.
PATH: SPRO Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax
on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings Check Calculation Procedure
Transaction Code: OBYZ
Database Table: T683, T683S, T683T, T683U, T685, T685A, T685T
By the above transaction it will display the following screen:

- 268 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

in the above screen double click on Define Procedures so it will display an screen click on
button so it display the following screen.

In the above screen give procedure name and description and select the same entry and click on
Control Data under Dialog Structure.
So it will display the following screen, click on

- 269 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Step: Number that determines the sequence of the conditions within a procedure.
CTyp(Condition Type) : Condition types which we already created in the above steps those
indicate each activity or tax in above case.
Fro, To (From , To): This indicates which tax should calculate on which base amount.
For example take: 20 1102Excise duty paid, for this tax the fields Fro, To fields I had given as
10, 10 That means 1102Excise duty paid should calculate on 1102 Base Amount.
Take 30 1102Cess paid, for this tax the fields Fro, To fields i had given as 10, 20 That means
1102Cess paid, should calculate on 1102 Base Amount + 1102Excise duty paid
AccKey: in this field assign Account Keys to respective Condition types as we created in above
steps.
After we maintain above parameters save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

Step 4: Assign Country to Calculation Procedure


PATH: SPRO Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax
on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings Assign Country to Calculation Procedure
Transaction Code: OBBG
Database Table: T005
- 270 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

By the above transaction it will display the a screen on that click on


so it will display the following small box:

button

In the above box give country in and click on enter button so it will show country in on the top
to screen as below:

Use this F4 function to select


your Procedure

In the above screen against IN assign your Calculation Procedure which we created in above step
select it by using F4 function.
Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

Step 5: Define Tax Codes for Sales and Purchases

Tax codes are used to:

Check the tax on sales/purchases amount in the document

Calculate the amount of tax on sales/purchases automatically on request

Calculate the non-deductible input tax portion

Check if a tax account with tax type (input or output tax) can be posted to

Determine the tax account

You define a tax code by entering a two-digit code to represent a tax percentage rate.
- 271 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
PATH: SPRO Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax
on Sales/Purchases Calculation Define Tax Codes for Sales and Purchases
Transaction Code: FTXP
Input Tax codes
By the above transaction it displays the following window:

In the above screen give your country IN and click enter button so it will display the following
screen as below:

In the above screen enter Tax Code as you want and pres enter button.
Note: Here I given i0 for input tax

In the above screen:


Tax Code: In this field Tax Code will copy automatically so give detail description. We define a
tax code by entering a two-digit code to represent a tax percentage rate.

- 272 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
Tax Type: It indicates whether this Tax Code is Input tax or Output Tax.You use the tax type to
specify whether the tax is an input tax or output tax. The system uses the tax type to check that
you are posting to an account with an allowed code. An error message is output if necessary. This
happens, for example, if you enter a tax code for input tax when posting to a customer account for
which only output tax codes are allowed. For every individual tax type, there are country-specific
definitions for whether the tax amount fields and the fields for the percentage specifications are
ready for input.
Tax Type V: Input Tax
Tax Type A: Output Tax
In above screen I had given V so it is Input Tax indicator.
CheckID: Indicator which determines that an error message should be issued if the tax amount is
not
correct. If the indicator is not set, a warning message appears in place of the error message. The
check indicator determines that if the tax amount is not correct, the error must be corrected. This
means that you can prevent users from posting incorrect amounts of output tax. If you do not set a
check indicator, the system issues a warning in the case of a different tax amount; a correction does
not have to be made. This is necessary for input tax postings, since the tax amount on the incoming
invoice is the amount users must enter when posting the invoice.
Enter the above parameters and click on enter button so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen I assigned all zeros to all input taxes so it is 0% tax indicator.
Save the activity so it will display the following screen:
- 273 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen we creating another input tax indicator with I1.
In the above screen against Tax code field give I1 and pres enter button so it will display the
following screen:

In the above screen:


Tax Code: In this field Tax Code will copy automatically so give detail description.
Tax Type: It indicates whether this Tax Code is Input tax or Output Tax
V: Input Tax
A: Output Tax
In above screen I had given V so it is Input Tax indicator.
CheckID: Indicator which determines that an error message should be issued if the tax amount is
not
correct. If the indicator is not set, a warning message appears in place of the error
message.
Enter the above parameters and click on enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 274 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In above case I had given taxes to Excise duty, Cess, Vat. That says if client is doing purchases
with the state this tax indicator is used (For India).
Save the activity. So it displays the following screen:

In the above screen we creating another input tax indicator with I2.
In the above screen against Tax code field give I2 and pres enter button so it will display the
following screen:

- 275 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen:


Tax Code: In this field Tax Code will copy automatically so give detail description.
Tax Type: It indicates whether this Tax Code is Input tax or Output Tax
V: Input Tax
A: Output Tax
In above screen I had given V so it is Input Tax indicator.
CheckID: Indicator which determines that an error message should be issued if the tax amount is
not
correct. If the indicator is not set, a warning message appears in place of the error
message.
Enter the above parameters and click on enter button so it will display the following screen:

In above case I had given taxes to Excise duty, Cess, CST. That says if client is doing purchases
out of the state this tax indicator is used (For India).
- 276 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Save the activity. So it displays the following screen:


Output Tax Codes

In the above screen enter Tax Code as you want and pres enter button.
Note: Here I given O0 for Output tax

In the above screen:


Tax Code: In this field Tax Code will copy automatically so give detail description.
Tax Type: It indicates whether this Tax Code is Input tax or Output Tax
V: Input Tax
A: Output Tax
In above screen I had given A so it is Output Tax indicator.
CheckID: Indicator which determines that an error message should be issued if the tax amount is
not
correct. If the indicator is not set, a warning message appears in place of the error
message.
Enter the above parameters and click on enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 277 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In above case I had given 0% taxes to Excise duty, Cess, VAT, and CST. That says if client is
doing sales out of the state or with in the state this tax indicator is used (For India) if tax is 0%.
Save the activity. So it displays the following screen:

In the above screen enter Tax Code as you want and pres enter button.
Note: Here I given O1 for Output tax

- 278 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen:


Tax Code: In this field Tax Code will copy automatically so give detail description.
Tax Type: It indicates whether this Tax Code is Input tax or Output Tax
V: Input Tax
A: Output Tax
In above screen I had given V so it is Input Tax indicator.
CheckID: Indicator which determines that an error message should be issued if the tax amount is
not
correct. If the indicator is not set, a warning message appears in place of the error
message.
Enter the above parameters and click on enter button so it will display the following screen:

In above case I had given taxes to Excise duty, Cess, VAT. That says if client is doing sales with in
the state this tax indicator is used (For India).
- 279 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Save the activity. So it displays the following screen:

In the above screen enter Tax Code as you want and pres enter button.
Note: Here I given O2 for Output tax

In the above screen:


Tax Code: In this field Tax Code will copy automatically so give detail description.
Tax Type: It indicates whether this Tax Code is Input tax or Output Tax
V: Input Tax
A: Output Tax
In above screen I had given V so it is Input Tax indicator.
CheckID: Indicator which determines that an error message should be issued if the tax amount is
not
correct. If the indicator is not set, a warning message appears in place of the error
message.
Enter the above parameters and click on enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 280 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In above case I had given taxes to Excise duty, Cess, CST. That says if client is doing sales out of
the state this tax indicator is used (For India).
Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.
Step 6: Create relevant G/L Accounts
PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger Master Records G/L
Accounts Individual Processing FS00 Centrally

FIELD NAME

INPU
T
VAL
UE

INPU
INPU
T
INPUT
T
INPUT
VALU VALUE VALU VALUE
E
E

INPUT
VALUE

INPU
INPU
T
INPUT
T
VALU
VALUE VALU
E
E

G/L
ACCOUNT
NO

22000
1

22000
2

220003

120002

120003

COMPANY
CODE

1102

1102

ACCOUNT
GROUP

ASSE
TS

P&L

22000
4

120001

1102

1102

1102

1102

1102

1102

ASSE
TS

ASSET
S

ASSE
TS

LIABIL
ITIES

LIABIL
ITIES

LIABIL
ITIES

LIABI
LITIE
S

Balanc Balanc

Balance

Balanc

Balance

Balance

Balance

Balanc

- 281 -

12000
4

SAVE
SAVE

SAVE

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
STATEMENT e sheet
ACCT/BALAN accou
nt
CE SHEET
ACCT
EXCI
SE
SHORT TEXT
/ LONG TEXT DUTY
PAID

I.G.REDDY
e sheet
accoun
t

sheet
account

e sheet
accoun
t

sheet
account

sheet
account

sheet
account

e sheet
accoun
t

CESS
PAYAB
LE

VAT
PAYAB
LE

CST
PAYA
BLE

CESS
PAID

VAT
PAID

CST
PAID

EXCISE
DUTY
PAYAB
LE

SAVE

SAVE

ACCOUNT
CURRENCY

INR

INR

INR

INR

INR

INR

INR

INR

ONLY
BALANCE IN
LOCAL
CURRENCY

TAX
CATEGORY

SAVE

LINEITEM
DISPLAY

SAVE

SORT KEY

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

SAVE

FIELD
STATUS
GROUP

G001

G001

G001

G001

G001

G001

G001

G001

SAVE

POSTING
WITHOUT
TAX
ALLOWED
OPEN ITEM
MANAGEME
NT

(X indicate to flag the check box)

Open Purchases G/L Account and go to Control Data tab in the FS00 screen. In that tab
assign > symbol to Tax Category field and flat the Posting Without Tax Allowed

Open Sales G/L Account and go to Control Data tab in the FS00 screen. In that tab assign
< symbol to Tax Category field and flat the Posting Without Tax Allowed

- 282 -

SAVE

SAVE

SAVE

SAVE

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Step 7: Define Tax Codes for Sales and Purchases

I.G.REDDY

PATH: SPRO Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax
on Sales/Purchases Posting Define Tax Accounts
Transaction Code: OB40
By the above transaction it displays the following window:

These are the account keys we


created. Double click on this
one by one to assign G/L

In the above screen you can view your Tax Account Keys. For each account key you need to
assign G/L accounts as you created in Transaction Code FS00.
To assign G/L accounts:

Now double click on Transaction 001 so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen give your chart of account and click on enter button so it will display the
following screen:

- 283 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen just click on Save

I.G.REDDY

button, so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen click on Posting Key button so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen assign 40 G/L Debit Posting key to Debit field, assign 50 G/L Credit
Posting key to Credit field and save the activity.
Click on Accounts button so It displays the following screen:
- 284 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

This is Excise duty paid account


key so assign that G/L account

Click on F4 function to assign


relevant G/L account.

In above screen assign Excise duty Paid G/L account number and save the screen.
Back to main screen.
NOTE: As I shown above G/L Account assignment do all other assignments to all account key
for input and output taxes.

Step 8: Assign Tax Codes for Non-Taxable Transactions


In this activity you define an incoming and outgoing tax code for each company code, to be used
for posting non-taxable transactions to tax-relevant accounts. Transactions posted like this are, for
example; goods issue delivery, goods movement, goods receipt purchase order, goods receipt
production order, order accounting.
PATH: SPRO Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax
on Sales/Purchases Posting Assign Tax Codes for Non-Taxable Transactions
Transaction Code: OBCL
Database Table: T001
By the above transaction it displays following screen:
Click on
button so it will display the following small box:

In the above box enter your company cods, and click on enter button so your company code will
display at the top of screen below:

- 285 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen against to your company code assign 0% Input Tax code and Output Tax Code.
Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

Posting Customer Invoice with Output taxes


PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingAccounts ReceivableDocument EntryF-22 Invoice General
Transaction Code: F-22

In the above screen enter Document Date, Document Type, Company Code, Posting Date, Period,
Currency/Rate, PstKy(Posting Key Customer Debit), Account(Customer Number).
After entering above all parameters pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 286 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter Amount, flag check box Calculate tax, text, PstKy(G/L Credit Posting
key), Account(G/L Credit account number).
After entering above parameters pres on enter button so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter * symbol to Amount field, + symbol to Text symbol, give Output
Tax code to Tax Code field and click on
button, so it will display the following screen:
In this case tax is output tax so I had given O1 and sales is with in state so CST tax wont
calculate.
If tax is out of state take tax Code as O2 then CST will calculate and VAT wont calculate.
- 287 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

NOTE: In the above screen enter Cost Center, Profit Center if create only, if dont create
them you can leave blank those fields

In the above screen enter Business area, Profit Center, Segment, Functional Area and click on enter
button.
Now go to Manu bar and Document + simulate

- 288 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Sales are with in state so CST tax wont calculate VAT will calculate. If tax is out of state take tax
Code as O2 then CST will calculate and VAT wont calculate.
Go to Manu bar Document + Post, so it will post the entry and gives the following information
message.

Back to easy access screen.


Report in G/L
PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger Account FBL3N Display/Change Line Items
Transaction Code: FBL3N
By the above transaction code it display selection screen on this click on multiple selection button
so it will displays following screen:

Select these G/L


accounts

This is copy button


click on this

Now click on copy button

, so it will take you to precious screen as below:

- 289 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Now click on executive button so it displays the following screen:

- 290 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Posting Vendor Invoice with Input Tax

I.G.REDDY

PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting Accounts Payable Document Entry F-43 Invoice General
Transaction code: F-43
By the above transaction code it display the following screen:

In the above screen enter Document Date, Document Type, Company Code, Posting Date, Period,
Currency/Rate, PstKy(Posting Key Vendor Credit), Account(Vendor Number).
After entering above all parameters pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter Amount, flag check box Calculate tax, text, PstKy(G/L Credit Posting
key), Account(G/L Debit account number).
After entering above parameters pres on enter button so it will display the following screen:
- 291 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter * symbol to Amount field, + symbol to Text symbol, give Output
button, so it will display the following screen:
Tax code to Tax Code field and click on
In this case tax is Input tax so I had given I1 and Purchases is with in state so CST tax wont
calculate.
If tax is out of state take tax Code as I2 then CST will calculate and VAT wont calculate.

In the above screen enter Business area, Profit Center, Segment, Functional Area and click on enter
button.
- 292 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Now go to Manu bar and Document + simulate

I.G.REDDY

In this case tax is Input tax so I had given I1 and Purchases is with in state so CST tax wont
calculate.
If tax is out of state take tax Code as I2 then CST will calculate and VAT wont calculate.

Go to Manu bar Document + Post, so it will post the entry and gives the following information
message.

Back to easy access screen.


Report in G/L
PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger Account FBL3N Display/Change Line Items
Transaction Code: FBL3N
By the above transaction code it display selection screen on this click on multiple selection button
so it will displays following screen:

- 293 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Select required G/L


accounts
Select this copy button to
executive

Now click on copy button

, so it will take you to precious screen as below:

Now click on executive button to get report.

- 294 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Back to easy access screen.

- 295 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 296 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY
CASH JOURNAL

A double-entry compact journal managed in account form that records the postings for cash
transactions.
By setting the cash balance at the beginning of the day, the cash journal shows the cash balance at
any time by adding the cash receipts and deducting the cash expenses. The cash journal also serves
as a basis for entries in the general ledger and thereby represents the "Cash" G/L account.
The cash journal is a sub ledger of Bank Accounting. It is used to manage a company's cash
transactions. The system automatically calculates and displays the opening and closing balances,
and the receipts and payments totals. You can run several cash journals for each company code.
You can also carry out postings to G/L accounts, as well as vendor and customer accounts.
The cash journal is a single-screen transaction. This means that you can enter, display, and change
cash journal documents on one screen.
Entering, saving, and posting cash journal entries
You can save cash journal entries locally in the cash journal. The system also calculates the
balances. The cash journal entries saved are then posted to the general ledger.
For a cash journal document, you can carry out CO account assignments, and have taxes, including
withholding taxes, calculated by the system with reference to business transactions, taking account
of tax jurisdiction codes, for example.
Displaying follow-on documents
You can also display the follow-on documents arising for the cash journal entries posted.
Defining cash journal business transactions
As well as defining cash journal business transactions in Customizing, you can also, if necessary,
define a new business transaction while you are making entries in the cash journal.
Printing the cash journal
You can print all cash journal entries posted in the time period displayed. You select the print form
in Customizing.
Printing receipts
You can print the cash journal entries saved. You select the print form in Customizing.
Deleting cash journal entries saved
If you have the appropriate authorization, you can delete cash journal entries that have been saved.
Displaying all cash journal documents that have been deleted
You can display all the cash journal documents that have been deleted within a specific time
period.
- 297 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Changing the cash journal

I.G.REDDY

You can change the cash journal and the company code while you are processing entries.

Create G/L Account for Cash Journal


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Bank AccountingBusiness TransactionsCash
JournalCreate G/L Account for Cash Journal
Transaction Code: FS00 or FS01
FIELDS
G/L Account
Company code
Account Group
P&L Statement acct / Balance sheet Account
Short text / G/L acct Long Text
Only Balance in Local Crcy
Line item display
Sort Key
Field statue group
Post automatically only

ENTRIES
G/L account number (From Assets number
range)
1102 (Your Company Code)
Assets
Balance Sheet Account
Cash Journal 1
X (Flag the check box)
X (Flag the check box)
001
G001
X (Flag the check box)

Save the G/L account and back to SPRO screen.


Amount Limit
You use these functions to define limit values for the FI cash journal; where these limits are
reached and exceeded, the user is prompted (in an information dialog box) to run certain activities.
The check is always performed in the first local currency of the company code. In the countries of
the European Union, these functions are used to draw attention to the legal requirement for
identifying the payer.
You do not have to enter a company code. The entry is then valid for all company codes within a
client that use the currency specified as the first local currency.
PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Bank AccountingBusiness TransactionsCash
Journal Amount Limit
Database Table: TCJ_MAX_AMOUNT
By above transaction it will display the following screen click on

- 298 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen maintain parameters like your company code, currency, Valid from (Date) and
Amount.
After maintain save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

- 299 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Define Number Range Intervals for Cash Journal Documents

I.G.REDDY

PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Bank AccountingBusiness TransactionsCash


Journal Define Number Range Intervals for Cash Journal Documents
By above transaction it will display the following screen

In above screen enter you company code and click on


another screen.
so it will display the following windiw:
In display screen click on

so it will display

In above window enter number range as 01 and for that give any number interval as I shown
above.
Click on enter button and save the screen.
Back to SPRO screen.
Set Up Cash Journal
To set up a new cash journal for a company code, enter the appropriate data for the following
fields:
Company code: Company code in which you want to run the cash journal
Number: Random number for cash journal identification; you can run several cash journals in
each company code

- 300 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
G/L account: G/L account to which you want to post the cash journal business transactions,
usually the petty cash account.
Currency: Currency in which you want to run the cash journal. You are free to choose the cash
journal currency. If you want to run a cash journal whose currency does not correspond to that of
the company code, you have to consider the following details in the corresponding cash journal
G/L account master data:
- The indicator Balances in local currency only should not be set
- The account currency must correspond to the company code currency
You can run several cash journals with different currencies in one cash journal G/L account.
Several cash journals with the same currency in one G/L account is however not possible. If you
want to run several cash journals in the same currency in one company code, you have to select
different cash journal G/L accounts.
Cash Journal Closed: Indicator that a cash journal is closed
Document types for:

G/L account postings


Outgoing payments to vendors
Incoming payments from vendors
Incoming payments from customers
Outgoing payments to customers

Name: Automatic language-dependent cash journal identification name, for example, Cash journal
1 SAP AG
Authorization group: Enables access protection for specific objects
NOTE: If you use extended withholding tax in your company code, you have to make the
corresponding settings for posting payments.

PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Bank AccountingBusiness TransactionsCash


Journal Set Up Cash Journal
Database Table: TCJ_CJ_NAMES, TCJ_C_JOURNALS
By above transaction it will display the following screen click on

- 301 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 302 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Define Business Transaction

I.G.REDDY

Company code: The company code in which the business transactions should be created

Business transaction number: Random number that uniquely identifies the business
transaction (these numbers are automatically assigned by the system)

Business transaction type:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

E (Expense)
R (Revenue)
B (Cash transfer cash journal to bank)
C (Cash transfer bank to cash journal)
D (Customers-incoming/outgoing payment)
K (Vendors-outgoing/incoming payment)

G/L account: Expense or revenue account for the offsetting postings of G/L account
postings, for
example 400000 or 800000;
Caution: You must not make entries in the fields for business transaction types D and K.

Tax code: Determines the business transaction control Caution: You may only make
entries in this field for business transaction types E and R.

Cash journal business transaction: Random, automatic language-dependent indicator for


the business transaction, for example, SAP Shop or Taxi.

Business transaction block: Indicator that a business transaction is blocked for additional
postings.

Account Modifiable during Document Entry: Indicator that you can change the G/L
account during document entry.
If you set the indicator, you can change the G/L account assigned to the business
transaction during document entry. The account defined is therefore a default value. If no
account is defined, you have to enter an account during document entry. You can set the
indicator for business transactions of the category E, R, C, and B.

Tax Code Modifiable during Document Entry: Indicator that you can change the tax
code during document entry.
If you set the indicator, you can change the tax code assigned to the business transaction
during document entry. The tax code defined is therefore a default value. If no tax code is
defined, you have to enter one during document entry provided this is required for the
account. You can set the indicator for business transactions of the category E and R.

PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Bank AccountingBusiness TransactionsCash


Journal Create, Change, Delete Business Transactions
- 303 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Database Table: TCJ_TRANSACTIONS, TCJ_TRANS_NAMES


By above transaction it will display the following screen click on

Set Up Print Parameters for Cash Journal


In order to print the cash journal and the cash journal receipts, you have to set up the corresponding
print program parameters per company code.

Enter the appropriate company code.

Specify the following print program parameters per company code:

For the cash journal:

- Print program
usually RFCASH00
- Report variant
For example, with entries FI_CASH_BB (Opening balance text),
FI_CASH_EB (Closing balance text), FI_CASH_CF (C/F text),
FI_CASH_SI (Signature text)

For the cash journal receipts:

- Correspondence type
For example

- 304 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
- SAPC1 Accounting document: If you set the indicator Accounting documents, the receipts
are
printed based on the FI documents. If you do not set the indicator, you can print all the
documents saved in the cash journal based on the cash journal documents. Not setting theindicator
is therefore recommended.
PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Bank AccountingBusiness TransactionsCash
Journal Set Up Print Parameters for Cash Journal
Database Table: TCJ_PRINT
By above transaction it will display the following screen click on

In the above screen enter above parameters.


Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

- 305 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 306 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 307 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Withholding Tax

I.G.REDDY

Tax that is charged at the beginning of the payment flow in some countries. Usually, the party that
is subject to tax does not pay the withholding tax over to the tax authorities himself.
When a customer that is authorized to deduct withholding tax pays invoices from a vendor subject
to withholding tax, the customer reduces the payment amount by the withholding tax proportion.
The customer then pays the tax withheld directly to the appropriate tax authorities (see diagram).
Withholding Tax

An exception to this rule is self-withholding. The vendor subject to tax then has the right to pay the
tax to the authorities himself.
Use
To calculate, pay, and report the withholding tax, the SAP System provides two functions:

Classic Withholding Tax (all Releases)

Extended Withholding Tax (from Release 4.0)

For each company code, you can decide whether you want to use classic or extended withholding
tax. Since the extended withholding tax option includes all the functions of classic withholding tax,
SAP recommends the use of extended withholding tax (see below: Table of Classic and Extended
Withholding Tax Functions).
If you have previously used classic withholding tax, and now wish to change over to extended
withholding tax, you must first convert the withholding tax data in all the company codes affected.

- 308 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Classic and Extended Withholding Tax Functions


Individual Functions

Withholding tax on outgoing payment


Withholding tax on incoming payment
Withholding tax posting at time of payment
Withholding tax posting at time of invoice
Withholding tax posting on partial payment
Number of withholding taxes for each document
item
Withholding tax base:
Net amount
Modified net amount
Gross amount
Tax amount
Modified tax amount
Rounding rule
Cash discount considered
Accumulation
Minimum/maximum amounts and exemption
limits
Number assignment on document posting
(certificate numbering)
Calculation formulas

Classic
Withholding
Tax
X
X

Max. 1
X
X

Extended
Withholding
Tax
X
X
X
X
X
Several
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

Country Version India comes ready configured with all the settings you need to track and remit
withholding taxes under the following sections of the Income Tax Act, 1961:

Payments to contractors and subcontractors (Section 194 C)

Insurance commission (Section 194 D)

Rent (Section 194 I)

Fees for professional or technical services (Section 194 J)

Interest other than interest on securities (Section 194 A) (only supported in the Extended
Withholding Tax solution)
Country Version India offers you two solutions for handling withholding tax (also known as tax
deducted at source or TDS). You can either use the Classic Withholding Tax solution or the
Extended Withholding Tax solution.
Taxes withheld under each section are treated differently with regard to the time limits for
remitting tax to the authorities, providing the taxpayer with a withholding tax certificate, and filing
an annual return. In addition, the formats for the withholding tax certificates and the returns also
differ.
The Income Tax Act requires you to calculate taxes as soon as you enter an invoice. However, if
you make a down payment to a vendor before you have received an invoice from it, you withhold
tax on the down payment. Then, once the invoice arrives, you clear the down payment against it.
- 309 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
When you prepare your annual returns, the act also requires you to make provisions for taxes on
services received but not yet invoiced.
Country Version India complements the generic Classic Withholding Tax and Extended
Withholding Tax solutions with additional functions that meet the needs of the Income Tax Act.
These functions allow you to:

Ensure that you remit taxes within the due date


Track and report withholding tax surcharges separately
Adjust withholding taxes when you clear a down payment against an invoice
Prepare withholding tax certificates and annual returns
Calculate withholding tax on provisions

Extended Withholding Tax


With extended withholding tax, you can process withholding tax from both the vendor and
customer view.
In Accounts Payable, the vendor is the person subject to tax, and the company code is obligated to
deduct withholding tax and pay this over to the tax authorities on the vendors behalf. In Accounts
Receivable, the company code itself is subject to tax, and the customers that do business with this
company code deduct withholding tax and pay this over to the tax authorities on the company
codes behalf. In both cases, the business partner of the person/entity subject to tax deducts the tax
and pays it over to the tax authorities.
Withholding tax is calculated and posted to the appropriate withholding tax accounts at different
stages, depending on the legal requirements in each country. As a rule, withholding tax is posted at
the same time that the payment is posted, in other words the outgoing payment (Accounts Payable)
or incoming payment (Accounts Receivable), is reduced by the withholding tax amount.
The key concept in extended withholding tax is the distinction between withholding tax type and
withholding tax code.

While withholding tax types represent basic calculation rules,


Withholding tax code specific features of these rules - in particular the percentage
rate
You can define any number of withholding tax codes for a given withholding tax type.

If a particular transaction requires more than one kind of withholding tax, this is covered in the
SAP System by defining more than one withholding tax type. When entering a line item, you can
enter withholding tax data for each of these withholding tax types.
The following special features also exist:

In some countries, such as Argentina and Italy, other kinds of posting are required for
certain business transactions. Instead of the payment amount being reduced by the
withholding tax amount, the withholding tax is posted as an offsetting entry to an expense
account You make the relevant settings in the withholding tax code.

- 310 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
Where cleared items are reset, the clearing document is automatically reversed if it contains
withholding tax data. For withholding tax types with accumulation, the accumulation base
amount is adjusted if the payment document is reversed.
Using the Extended Withholding Tax solution, you can withhold and report tax under all sections
of the Income Tax Act listed in Withholding Tax.
Since a company may consist of more than one entity responsible for withholding taxes, each of
which is identified by a separate TAN, you use a separate SAP organizational unit to represent
each entity, the section code.
Country Version India comes with sample customizing settings for all of the aforementioned
sections of the Income Tax Act. The settings include:
Withholding tax types
Withholding tax codes
Official withholding tax keys, which represent the different sections of the Income Tax Act
Recipient types, which represent the categorization of taxpayers into "companies" and
"others," again, as per the Income Tax Act You must also customize your own section
codes.
Day-to-Day Activities
You are required to calculate taxes either when you enter an invoice or when you make any sort of
payment, whichever comes first. Since a full payment is seldom made before the invoice arrives,
that means in effect that you withhold taxes when you enter an invoice or a down payment.
When you enter a vendor invoice or make a down payment that is liable to withholding tax, the
system automatically creates line items for the appropriate taxes, including surcharges. Since
different taxes need to be remitted on different dates, depending on the section of the Income Tax
Act, the system also calculates and records each line item's due date.
If you first make a down payment (and withhold tax on it) and then enter the vendor invoice later
on, you have to clear the invoice against the down payment so that you do not withhold tax on the
same item twice.
As far as your receivables are concerned, you also enter withholding tax certificates sent to you by
your customers, as proof of tax that they have withheld on payments to you.
Periodic Processing
At the end of each period, you make provisions for taxes on services received.
The authorities in India require you to remit taxes following a specific procedure. First, you create
a remittance challan with a list of the withholding tax items that you are remitting. You then send
the challan to the authorities, along with the check. Once the check has been cashed, the bank
sends you a bank challan to confirm the payment. You then enter the bank challan in the system.
The system automatically tracks each withholding tax item's remittance challan and bank challan.
When you have remitted the tax, you can print out withholding tax certificates for all taxes that you
have withheld, using functions specific to Country Version India.
Before you create your annual returns, you can also check for any customers that have not yet sent
you a withholding tax certificate for tax that they have withheld from you.
- 311 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Again, with receivables, if you make interest payments to your customers, you must also withhold
tax on them as appropriate.
Journal entry for a Withholding Tax as below:
Purchases/ rent/ job work on contract a/c DR *****
To Vendor/ Contractor
To TDS a/c
To Surcharge a/c
To Education Cess on TDS a/c
To Education Cess on surcharge a/c
To Higher Education Cess on TDS a/c
To Higher Education Cess on Surcharge a/c

*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****

In the above entry in credit side we have withholding tax line items like:

TDS a/c
Surcharge a/c
Education Cess on TDS a/c
Education Cess on surcharge a/c
Higher Education Cess on TDS a/c
Higher Education Cess on Surcharge a/c

All the above different taxes we have to create as Tax Type and Tax code in SAP, that
configuration we do in the following steps.

- 312 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Check Withholding Tax Countries

I.G.REDDY

PATH: SPRO Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Check Withholding Tax Countries
It will display another screen click on

so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter your country and W/Tax City


Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.
Define Withholding Tax Type
In one business transaction, several kinds of withholding tax may have to be withheld. The SAP
System uses withholding tax types to reflect this. Several withholding tax types can be defined in
the system; one or more can be assigned in the vendor master record.
The withholding tax type governs the way in which extended withholding tax is calculated and is
defined at country level. As far as the time of posting for withholding tax amounts is concerned,
there are two different categories of withholding tax types:

Withholding tax type for posting at time of invoice

Withholding tax type for posting at time of payment

Withholding tax types classify different withholding taxes according to such features as:

Point at which the tax is posted


Method of calculating tax base amount
Accumulation

Several withholding tax codes can be assigned to one withholding tax type.
withholding tax types for calculating tax at invoice posting and another one for calculating tax at
payment posting. All of the withholding tax types are customized so that certificate numbers are
not assigned at this level. They are assigned by the programs that you use for printing the
withholding tax certificates instead.
When you have defined the withholding tax types, define the withholding tax codes and recipient
types.
When you enter a document that is liable to tax, the system automatically applies the tax type and
tax code appropriate to that vendor or customer.
- 313 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Make the following entries:

I.G.REDDY

General data

Define the name of the withholding tax type.

Calculation

Define the details for calculating the withholding tax base amounts and the rounding rules for the
withholding tax amount.
You also determine whether the withholding tax amount is to be both calculated and posted or only
calculated (the latter is the case in France, for example).

Base amount

Field

Meaning

Net amount

The withholding tax base amount is the line item net amount.

Modified
amount

net

The withholding tax base amount is equal to line item net amount plus a number
of specific tax amounts. The processing keys for the tax amounts to be totaled
have to be specified for this withholding tax type in a separate activity in
Customizing.

Gross amount

The withholding tax base amount equals the line item gross amount.

Tax amount

The withholding tax base amount equals the tax amount of the line item.

Modified
amount

tax

The withholding tax base amount is equal to the total of certain specific tax
amounts. The processing keys for the tax amounts to be totaled have to be
specified for this withholding tax type in a separate activity in Customizing.

You can define dependencies between withholding tax types via the fields reduced base amount or
Inherit base. If the field Reduce base is selected in a withholding tax type, the withholding tax base
amount is reduced by the withholding tax amount of the dependent type. Alternatively, you can
select the field Inherit base. The withholding tax base amount then corresponds to the withholding
tax amount of the dependent type.
The final amount used for the withholding tax calculation is calculated by applying the proportion
subject to tax (defined in the withholding tax code) to the base amount defined here in the
withholding tax type.

Rounding rules

You have the following options for rounding withholding tax amounts:

Commercial (W/tax comm. round.)


Rounding up (Round w/tax amount up)
Rounding down (Round w/tax amount)

Accumulation type
- 314 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
Here you define whether withholding tax base amounts and withholding tax amounts should be
accumulated for this withholding tax type, and if so, for what period.
If the law permits withholding tax exempt amounts over a specific time period (for example,
monthly, annually), the amounts posted in this period must be retained. This ensures that
withholding tax is posted as soon as the exempt amount is exceeded. In the SAP System, this is
reflected by accumulation. You can accumulate amounts for calendar years, quarters, or months.
Since with accumulation, accumulated amounts are already included in the calculation of the
withholding tax amounts for the current payment in the period, the accumulation cannot be used
for summation.
If you have activated accumulation for a withholding tax type, the accumulated withholding tax
base amount in the current period (month, quarter, year) is added to the withholding tax base
amount of the line item for which the withholding tax amount is to be calculated. The withholding
tax amount is determined by applying the withholding tax rate or formula (scale) to this total, and
subtracting the withholding tax amount accumulated in the period concerned. A formula is a series
of staggered withholding tax rates valid for different withholding tax base amount intervals. The
current withholding tax base amount and the tax amount itself are added to the corresponding
values in the accumulation table. Accumulation is entered per customer/vendor account,
withholding tax type, and withholding tax code in the local currency of the company code
concerned.
To prevent a withholding tax posting as soon as the accumulated withholding tax amount exceeds a
defined maximum, select the field Acc. w/tax to max.

Control data

Here you define

Whether manually entering the withholding tax base amount or the withholding tax
amount is permitted during document entry

Whether you want to suppress withholding tax certificate numbering.

Information for regional withholding tax

You can enter regional codes here. The regional code ensures that the withholding tax is reported
and paid to the relevant tax authorities.

Definition of minimum and maximum amounts

Here you define whether you want to maintain minimum and maximum amounts at withholding
tax type level or withholding tax code level.

PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)


Withholding TaxExtended Withholding TaxCalculationWithholding Tax TypeDefine
Withholding Tax Type for Invoice Posting
- 315 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Database Table: T059P, T059U

I.G.REDDY

By the above PATH it will display the following window:

In the above window enter country code and click on enter button.

It will display another screen click on

so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen maintain parameters as I shown and click on


display the following screen:

- 316 -

next entry button so it will

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen maintain parameters as I shown and click on


display the following screen:

- 317 -

next entry button so it will

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen maintain parameters as I shown and click on


display the following screen:

next entry button so it will

In the above screen maintain parameters as I shown and click on


display the following screen:

next entry button so it will

- 318 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen maintain parameters as I shown and click on


display the following screen:

next entry button so it will

After maintain the above all parameters click on save the button to save the activity.
Back to SPRO screen.
Define Withholding Tax Keys
Systems object that you use to classify withholding tax items according to which section of the
Income Tax Act they belong to. This information is required in TDS returns.
Whenever you post a withholding tax item, assign it a withholding tax code as normal. Since each
withholding tax code is also assigned to an withholding tax key, the system automatically knows
which section of the Income Tax Act you have withheld the tax under.
When you prepare a TDS return, it shows which section of the Income Tax Act you withheld each
item under.

PATH: SPRO Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Basic Settings Define Withholding Tax Keys
Database Table: T059O, T059OT
By the above PATH it will display the following window:

- 319 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above window enter country code and click on enter button.
It will display another screen click on

so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter the section code and description.


Save the activity and back to SPRO screen

- 320 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Check Recipient Types

I.G.REDDY

A system object that you use to classify payment recipients as legal persons or natural persons, for
the purposes of withholding tax reporting.
For each withholding tax type, create two entries as follows:
Recipient Type Text

CO

Companies

OT

Others

Country Version India comes with sample settings for the sample withholding tax types
provided.
Enter the recipient type in each vendor master and each customer master.
The TDS returns separate the information about taxes withheld on legal persons and on natural
persons.

PATH: SPRO Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Basic Settings Check Recipient Types
Database Table: T059C, T059D
By the above PATH it will display the following window:

In the above window enter country code and click on enter button.
It will display another screen click on

so it will display the following screen:

- 321 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter Check Recipient Types along with W/Tax type, save the activity and
back to SPRO screen.

- 322 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Check Income Types

I.G.REDDY

In this activity you check the revenue types for the withholding tax report.
You use the revenue type to classify your (foreign) vendors by revenue. You need the revenue
types as a specification for the withholding tax report.
1. Check the list of revenue types in the standard system and make any necessary adjustments.
2. Store the revenue type in the withholding tax code under "Specifications for the withholding tax
report".
For more information on this, read the Check withholding tax code chapter.

PATH: SPRO Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Basic Settings Check Income Types
Database Table: T059E, T059G
By the above PATH it will display the following window:

In the above window enter country code and click on enter button.
It will display another screen click on

so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter income types save the activity and back to SPRO screen

- 323 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Define Business Places

I.G.REDDY

PATH: SPRO Cross-Application Components General Application Functions Nota


fiscal CNPJ Business Places Define Business Places
By the above screen it will display the following window:

In the above window enter Company Code and click on enter button.
It will display another screen click on

so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter business place and description.


Click on save button it will display the following window:

Enter above parameters and click on enter button and back to SPRO screen.
- 324 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Define Section Codes


A system object that represents the organizational unit responsible for collecting and remitting
withholding tax, as identified by a TAN. Each company can have more than one TAN, so in the
SAP system, a company code can also have multiple section codes.
When you post a document with a withholding tax item (for example, a vendor invoice or a credit
memo), enter the section code in order to make sure that the tax item is assigned to the correct
TAN.
In order to ensure that you always enter a section code, we recommend that you create a validation
for this field.
When you print withholding tax certificates, each of your section codes can define its own forms,
depending on which format is required by the income tax office. The certificate supplied with the
standard system also shows the address data from the section code.
Each TAN holder files its own tax returns. When you prepare a TDS return, you enter the TAN
holders section code on the selection screen. The annual returns then show only the withholding
tax items that are assigned to that section code.

PATH: SPRO Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Basic Settings South Korea Define Section
Codes

By the above PATH it will display the following window:

In the above window enter Company Code and click on enter button.
It will display another screen click on

so it will display the following screen:

- 325 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter new section code and assign you business place which you created and
click on save button so it will display the following window:

Enter above parameters and click on enter button.


Back to SPRO screen.

Define Business Places


PATH: SPRO Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Basic Settings India Define Business Places
In the display another screen click on

so it will display the following screen:

- 326 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen assign section code to your company code.


Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

Assign Factory Calendars to Business Places


In this IMG activity, you effectively specify which days the tax offices that you work with are
open. The system uses this information when you post a vendor invoice, so that it can allow for
public holidays when it
determines the tax due date.
This activity is optional. If you do not make any entries, the system still determines the tax due
date, but without reference to any factory calendar.
You have maintained factory calendars for each of the calendars followed by the tax offices.

PATH: SPRO Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Basic Settings India Assign Factory
Calendars to Business Places
In the display another screen click on

so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen with your company code assign section code, factory calendar and rule.
Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

Maintain Tax Due Dates

- 327 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
In this IMG activity, you maintain the various tax due dates. Because due dates can differ,
depending on the withholding tax type and recipient type, you can maintain the dates at this level.
Make sure that you maintain entries for all the recipient types that you use.
For each permutation of official withholding tax key and recipient type, specify when the tax has to
be remitted.
PATH: SPRO Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Basic Settings India Maintain Tax Due
Dates
In the display another screen click on

so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen to your country assign Official Tax key, Recipient type and no of tax due date
days.
Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

- 328 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Define Withholding Tax Codes

I.G.REDDY

You define the tax base and rate in the withholding tax code. You make the settings for each
country and withholding tax type. You can therefore define as many withholding tax codes as
required for each withholding tax type.
Country Version India comes with a sample tax code for each of the sample withholding tax types
provided. The basic-rate withholding tax codes are set to 2%; the surcharge tax codes are set to
0.4%. For reporting purposes, assign each withholding tax code to a withholding tax key.
Make the following settings:

General data

Define the description of the withholding tax code, and where necessary, the official
withholding tax key.
Official withholding tax keys are used on official forms when reporting taxes,

Base amount

Define the portion to be taxed. This percentage rate is used to determine the final withholding
tax base
amount and is applied to the withholding tax base amount calculated as a result
of the setting in the withholding tax type.

Posting
Define a posting indicator. This can have one of the following values:
Value

Name

Description

Normal posting

The withholding tax amount is deducted from the vendor


line item amount (posting at invoice entry) or from the
payment amount (posting at time of payment), and the
system creates a line item for the withholding tax.

Offsetting entry
to
G/L
account/No
reduction
in
subledger

The withholding tax amount is multiplied by the factor


1/(1-p), where p stands for the withholding tax rate of the
withholding tax code. The system creates two
withholding tax line items with opposing debit/credit
signs.
This option is incompatible with withholding tax scales.
(This function is only relevant for Argentina, when using
the "grossing up" option).

Offsetting entry
to G/L account:

The system creates two withholding tax line items with


opposing debit/credit signs.

- 329 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Calculation

I.G.REDDY

Define the withholding tax rate or the information for using calculation scales (formulas).
For the withholding tax rate, you can enter either a percentage rate between 0 and 100, or you
can enter a fraction. The system then uses this rate to calculate the withholding tax amount from
the withholding tax base amount.
If you set the indicator Withholding Tax Formulas, the system calculates the withholding tax
amount from the withholding tax base amount using one of the scales defined for this withholding
tax type/code combination.
All calculations are made in the respective local currency. This means that you have to
maintain the minimum and maximum for the withholding tax amount, the minimum base amount,
the withholding tax exempt base amount, and the scales in the local currency of the company code.

Reporting information
Where necessary, define the region, the provincial code, and the type of income.

PATH: SPRO Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Calculation Withholding Tax Codes Define
Withholding Tax Codes
Database Table: T059Z, T059ZT
By the above PATH it will display the following window:

In the above window enter country code and click on enter button.
It will display another screen click on

so it will display the following screen:

- 330 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

We configure in the above activity to calculate TDS of @2% on total value of invoice or contract
amount or ect.
In the above screen enter all parameters as I shown and click on next entry button
display the following screen

so it will

We configure in the above activity to calculate Surcharge on TDS @0.2000% on 2% of TDS


value.
In the above screen enter all parameters as I shown and click on next entry button
display the following screen

- 331 -

so it will

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

We configure in the above activity to calculate Education Cess on TDS @0.044% on 2% of TDS
value.
In the above screen enter all parameters as I shown and click on next entry button
display the following screen.

so it will

We configure in the above activity to calculate Education Cess on Surcharge @ 0.4400% on


0.200% of Surcharge value
In the above screen enter all parameters as I shown and click on next entry button
display the following screen.

- 332 -

so it will

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

We configure in the above activity to calculate Higher Education Cess @ 0.0220% on 2% if TDS
value
In the above screen enter all parameters as I shown and click on next entry button
display the following screen.

so it will

We configure in the above activity to calculate Higher Education Cess @ 0.0220% on 0.20% of
surcharge value
In the above screen enter all parameters as I shown and click on save button to save entire activity,
and back to SPRO screen

Portray Dependencies Between Withholding Tax Types


- 333 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
PATH: SPRO Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Calculation Withholding Tax Base Amount
Portray Dependencies Between Withholding Tax Types
Database Table: T059P, T059U
By the above PATH it will display the following window:

In the above window enter country code and click on enter button it will display the following
screen:

In the above screen each tax in withholding tax is liked with one number as W/Tax type no
In the above screen double click on N3 W/TAX EDUCATION CESS ON TDS so it will display
the following screen:

The above screen is N3 - W/Tax of Education Cess on TDS and this is calculate on TDS. TDS
is with number 1 so we should assign that number to N3 as above.
In the above screen assign no 1 to Depend. On type no field save the activity.
- 334 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

When you save it will automatically display the following screen.

Now double click on N4 W/TAX EDUCATION CESS ON SURCHAGE so it will display the
following screen:

The above screen is N4 W/TAX EDUCATION CESS ON SURCHAGE and that should
calculate on Surcharge, surcharge is with number 2.so we have assign number 2 to this tax as
above.
Save the activity and back to following screen:

- 335 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
In above screen double click on N5 W/TAX HIGHER EDUCATION CESS ON TDS so it will
display the following screen:

The above screen is N5 W/Tax Higher Education Cess on TDS and that should calculate on
TDS. The TDS is with number 1. We have to assign that number to above tax as I shown.
Save the activity and back to following screen.

In the above screen click on N6 W/TAX HIGHER EDUCATION CESS ON SURCHARGE so it


will display the following screen:

- 336 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
The above screen is with N6 W/Tax Higher Education Cess on Surcharge and it should
calculate on Surcharge. Surcharge is with number 2.
So it assigned number 2 to above tax in this screen.
Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

Define Min/Max Amounts for Withholding Tax Codes

If the legal requirements permit minimum, maximum, or exempt amounts for the withholding tax
base amount or the withholding tax amount, you can define these here.
All calculations are made in the respective local currency. This means that you have to maintain
the minimum and maximum for the withholding tax amount, the minimum base amount, the
withholding tax exempt base amount, and the withholding tax scales in the local currency of the
company code.
You can define the minimum and maximum amounts at one of two levels, depending on the setting
on the corresponding withholding tax type for base amounts or withholding tax amounts .

Define Min/Max Amounts for Withholding Tax Types

Define Min/Max Amounts for Withholding Tax Codes

Make the following settings:

Withholding tax minimum amount

If the withholding tax amount calculated is lower than the minimum amount you specify here,
then the system calculates the withholding tax amount as being zero.

Withholding tax maximum amount

If the withholding tax amount calculated is higher than the withholding tax maximum amount
you specify here, then the system uses this maximum amount in the withholding tax calculation.

Minimum base amount

If the withholding tax base amount is lower than the minimum base amount you specify here,
then the system calculates the withholding tax amount as being zero. If the withholding tax base
amount exceeds the minimum base amount specified here, the system uses the whole base amount
to calculate the withholding tax (compare Withholding tax base exempt amount).

Withholding tax base exempt amount (only possible at withholding tax code level)

If the withholding tax base amount is lower than the withholding tax base exempt amount, then
the system calculates the withholding tax amount as being zero.
If the withholding tax base amount exceeds the withholding tax base exempt amount specified
here, then the system uses the base amount as reduced by the exempt amount for the withholding
tax calculation.
- 337 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
For accumulation, the total accumulated base amount is checked against the minimum base amount
or the withholding tax base exempt amount. In contrast, the withholding tax amount as reduced by
the values already accumulated is checked against the withholding tax minimum amount or the
withholding tax maximum amount.
PATH: SPRO Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Calculation Minimum and Maximum
Amounts Define Min/Max Amounts for Withholding Tax Codes
Database Table: T059MINMAX
By the above PATH it will display the following window:

In the above window enter country code and click on enter button.
It will display another screen click on

so it will display the following screen:

The amount we gave in the above screen will be exempted from the basic while calculation of tax
TDS.
Now click on next entry

button for another entry as below:

- 338 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
In the above screen provide exemption amount for surcharge. Save the activity and back to SPRO
screen.
Assign Withholding Tax Types to Company Codes
PATH: SPRO Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Company Code Assign Withholding Tax
Types to Company Codes
Database Table: T001WT
It will display a screen click on

so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen we assigned withholding tax type N1 to company code.


Now click on next entry

button to assign next entry as below:

In the above screen we assigned withholding tax type N2 to company code.


Now click on next entry

button to assign next entry as below:


- 339 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen we assigned withholding tax type N3 to company code.


Now click on next entry

button to assign next entry as below:

In the above screen we assigned withholding tax type N4 to company code.


Now click on next entry

button to assign next entry as below:

In the above screen we assigned withholding tax type N5 to company code.


- 340 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Now click on next entry

I.G.REDDY
button to assign next entry as below:

In the above screen we assigned withholding tax type N6 to company code.


Now click on save button to save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

Activate Extended Withholding Tax


PATH: SPRO Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Company Code Activate Extended
Withholding Tax
Database Table:
By the above PATH it will display the following screen, in that screen click on
so it will display the following box

In the above box enter your company code and pres enter it will appears on the top to screen as
below:

- 341 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Flag the check box against to your company code to activate W.tax .
Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

I.G.REDDY

Creation of required G/L a/cs for Withholding Tax


The following 4 G/L account creates with following PATH:
PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingGeneral LedgerMaster RecordsG/L
AccountsIndividual ProcessingFS00 - Centrally

G/L
a/c
Num
ber

13000
0
13100
0
13200
0

13300
0

P&L
Short Only
Stateme
Text / balanc
Open
Line Sor
Comp
nt acct /
Acc.
G/L
e in
item
Item
t
any
Balance
Group
Acct
Local Managem Displa Ke
.Code
Sheet
Long Curre
ent
y
y
Accoun
Text
ncy
t
Balance
Liabilit
TDS
1102
X
X
X
001
Sheet
ies
a/c
Account
Balance
Liabilit
Surcha
1102
Sheet
X
X
X
001
ies
rge a/c
Account
Educat
Balance
Liabilit
ion
1102
Sheet
X
X
X
001
ies
Cess
Account
a/c
Higher
Balance Educat
Liabilit
1102
Sheet
ion
X
X
X
001
ies
Account Cess
a/c

Field
Status
Varia
nt

Post
Autom
atically
only

G001

G001

G001

G001

Define Accounts for Withholding Tax to be Paid Over


PATH: Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Withholding TaxExtended Withholding TaxPostingAccounts for Withholding TaxDefine
Accounts for Withholding Tax to be Paid Over
With the above PATH it will display the following window:

- 342 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
enter your company code it above window and click on enter button so it will display the following
screen:

In the above screen flag the check box as shown to W/tax Code, Type and save the screen so it will
display the following screen:

This is your TDS G/L


account
This is your Surcharge
G/L account
This is your Education
Cess G/L account
This is your Higher
Education G/L account

In the above screen we assign G/L accounts with respective W/Tax type and W/Tax code to
transaction key WIT.
Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.
Specify Document Type (Accounts Payable)
PATH: Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Withholding TaxExtended Withholding TaxPosting India Remittance Challans
Document Types Specify Document Type (Accounts Payable)
Database Table: J_1IEWT_CUST
It will display a screen click on

so it will display the following screen:

- 343 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter you Company Code and Document Type as SA (General Ledger
Document Type).
Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.
Remittance Challan
A document, in India, that you present to a bank when depositing any form of withholding tax that
you have retained.
The challan states how much tax is being deposited. A separate challan is required for each form
of withholding tax.
Maintain Number Groups
In this and the following IMG activities, you set up the numbering for the remittance challans.
Since you must create one challan for the taxes in each section of the Income Tax Law (official
withholding tax keys), and for separate tax offices (business place), you must create different
number range objects
for each permutation of official withholding tax key and business place.
The procedure is as follows:
1. For each permutation of tax key and business place, create a number group.
2. For each number group, create a number range.
3. Assign each number group to a number range.
In this activity, you group together the permutations of company code, business place, and official
withholding tax key that you want to remit withholding tax for. You can assign the same group
number to more than one permutation, if you need to.
PATH: Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Withholding TaxExtended Withholding TaxPosting India Remittance Challans
Maintain Number Groups
Database Table: J_1IEWTNUMGR_N
It will display a screen click on

so it will display the following screen:


- 344 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen provide information like company code, section code, official W/Tax Key and
new entry to Number Group.
Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.
Assign Number Ranges to Number Groups
PATH: Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Withholding TaxExtended Withholding TaxPosting India Remittance Challans Assign
Number Ranges to Number Groups
Database Table:
It will display a screen click on

so it will display the following screen:

in the above screen give number group as we created in previous step and IntNR (internal number
assignment) any new entry.
Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

- 345 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Maintain Number Ranges

I.G.REDDY

PATH: Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)


Withholding TaxExtended Withholding TaxPosting India Remittance Challans
Maintain Number Ranges
By the above PATH it will display an screen click on
following
screen:

button so it will display the

In the above screen go to menu bar Group + Insert it will display the following window:

In the above box enter your Company Code and click on enter button so it will display the
following window:

In the above window maintain text, mention present year and give any number interval.
Click on enter button so the entry will appear in main screen below:

- 346 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen:


Flag the check box of your number interval which you just created in the above screen.
Double click on your Internal number range which you created in above step
Now double click on Element/Group, so your number range will assign to your number range
text as below:

Now save the above activity and back to SPRO screen.

Maintain Number Groups and SAPscript Forms


In this IMG activity, you specify which SAP script forms you want to use to print the withholding
tax certificates. These forms are used when you:

Print withholding tax certificates for vendors

Print withholding tax certificates for customers

Country Version India comes with a form, J_1IEWTCERT, which you can use as the basis for
creating your own forms.
For each type of withholding tax (official withholding tax key):
Specify which SAP script form you want to use If different tax offices require different forms, you
can enter different forms for different offices.
- 347 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Specify what number group you want for each certificate. This information determines which
number range the system uses to number the certificates. You assign the number range to the
number group in the next two activities.
PATH: Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Withholding TaxExtended Withholding TaxPosting India Withholding Tax Certificates
for Vendors and Customers Maintain Number Groups and SAPscript Forms
It will display a screen click on

so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen maintain the parameters with SAP Script form and new number group.
Save the activity back to SPRO screen.

Assign Number Ranges to Number Groups


PATH: Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Withholding TaxExtended Withholding TaxPosting India Withholding Tax Certificates
for Vendors and Customers Assign Number Ranges to Number Groups
It will display a screen click on

so it will display the following screen:

in the above screen give number group as we created in previous step and IntNR (internal number
assignment) any new entry.
Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.
Maintain Number Ranges

- 348 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
PATH: Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)
Withholding TaxExtended Withholding TaxPosting India Withholding Tax Certificates
for Vendors and Customers Maintain Number Ranges
By the above PATH it will display an screen click on
following
screen:

button so it will display the

In the above screen go to menu bar Group + Insert it will display the following window:

In the above box enter your Company Code and click on enter button so it will display the
following window:

In the above window maintain text, mention present year and give any number interval.
Click on enter button so the entry will appear in main screen below:

- 349 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen:


Flag the check box of your number interval which you just created in the above screen.
Double click on your Internal number range which you created in above step
Now double click on Element/Group, so your number range will assign to your number range
text as below:

Now save the above activity and back to SPRO screen.

Maintain Company Code Settings - Excise Registrations


PATH: SPTO Logistics - General Tax on Goods Movements India Basic Settings
Maintain Company Code Settings
It will display a screen click on

so it will display the following screen:

- 350 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter your company code and First Month of Fiscal year.
Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

- 351 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Assign Withholding Tax to Vendor Master Data

I.G.REDDY

PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting Accounts Payable Master Records Maintain


Centrally XK02 Change
By above PATH it will display the following screen

In the above screen enter your vendor number, company code, purchase organization and flag the
check box of Withholding tax, now click on enter button so it will display the following screen

These are all W/Tax IDs issue by tax


authorities optimal to assign

In the above screen enter the shown parameters like assigning all withholding type, codes to
vendor.
Save the vendor master data back to easy access screen.

- 352 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Posting Vendor Invoice

I.G.REDDY

PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingAccounts PayableDocument EntryF-43 Invoice General


Transaction Code: F-43
In this case assume company had given a job work on contract to a person and that person is
treated as vendor in sap. So today we are paying him total contract amount and deducting tax from
that.

In above screen give dates, document type, period, company code, currency at bottom of screen
vendor credit posting key and vendor number.
After providing above information pres enter button it will display the following screen:

- 353 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
In the above screen give contract amount, business place, section code, debit posting key and debit
G/L account number and click on enter button it will display another screen as below:

In the above window it shows all taxes that are going to be affect. Just pres enter button or click on
continue button so it will take you to below screen:

In the above screen give * symbol to amount field and + symbol to text field.
Now click on

button so it will display the following screen.

- 354 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

NOTE: In the above screen enter Cost Center, Profit Center if create only, if dont create
them you can leave blank those fields
In the above screen give information to business area, Cost Center, Profit Center, Segment,
Functional Area and pres enter button or click on continue button.
NOTE: If activated or configuration in CONTROLLING steps and created cost centers, profit
centers then only you assign those fields or you can leave them blank.
Now go to menu bar and click on document + simulate it will display the following screen:

- 355 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

To post above entry again go to menu bar document + post so it will post the entry and give
following information:

In the above information it will show the document number and posted information.
Back to easy access screen.
Report
PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingGeneral LedgerAccountFBL3N Display/Change Line Items.
Transaction code: FBL3N
In the displayed select required all tax relevant G/L a/c number s and executive the screen it will
display the following report screen

- 356 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 357 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Create Remittance Challan


PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingAccounts PayableWithholding
TaxIndiaExtended Withholding TaxRemittance of Withholding TaxJ1INCHLN - Create
Remittance Challan
Transaction code: J1INCHLN
By above PATH it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter parameters as above like:


1) Company code
7) Vendor (Vendors numbers against whom we are
paying tax)
2) Fiscal Year
8) Recipient Types (As we created in W/Tax
Configuration)
3) Business Place/ Section Code
9) Document Date
4) Document Number (The number which is
assigned to Posted document) 10) Posting Date
5) Posting Dates (Date when invoice is raised)
11) Bank Account (Your SBI check issue G/L
a/c number)
6) Section (Tax section at which tax is deducted) 12) Business Area
In the above screen enter all above information and click on Executive button so it will display
the following box:

- 358 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above box select Document Number radio button and click on enter button or click on
continue button so it will display the following screen:

In the window simple


click on this button

In the above window it is showing all taxes which we are paying to bank for challan.
Now click on back button simple so it will display the following window.

- 359 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Double click on this line


item

In the above window it shows one line item with an amount of Rs 1/- from SBI Cheque issue
G/L, double click on that line item it will display the following screen:

In this field delete this Rs 1/- and


give * symbol.

In the above screen it displays Rs 1/- in Amount line. Delete that Rs 1/- and give * symbol in
that and pres enter button then go to menu bar Document + simulate so it will display the
following window.

- 360 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above window it shows payment of taxes to bank through SBI cheque issue to bank for
challan. So it is a reversal entry of invoice in regard of taxes.
Go to menu bar Document + Post to post the entry so it will display the following screen

In above screen it shows clearing and creating remittance challan. Back to easy access screen.

Report
PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingGeneral LedgerAccountFBL3N Display/Change Line Items.
Transaction code: FBL3N
In the displayed select required all tax relevant G/L a/c number s and executive the screen it will
display the following report screen

- 361 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen you can view all open items of taxes are cleared.

- 362 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Enter Bank Challan

I.G.REDDY

PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingAccounts PayableWithholding


TaxIndiaExtended Withholding TaxRemittance of Withholding Tax J1INBANK - Enter
Bank Challan
Transaction code: J1INBANK
By above PATH it will display the following screen:

Click on this F4
function to assign
Challan clearing

In the above screen enter:


1) Company code,
2) Fiscal year,
3 Challan clearing number (Click on F4 function and select your latest or required challan number
it will
automatically display on screen and other 2 fields will fill
automatically)
4) Bank challan number (give any new number that ma be alphanumeric),
5) Bank challan date,
6) Bank key (your house bank key).
Now click on Executive button so it will display the following information:

- 363 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
In the above screen you can view the information of challan update.
Back to easy access screen.

- 364 -

I.G.REDDY

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Certificates Print

I.G.REDDY

PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingAccounts PayableWithholding


TaxIndiaExtended Withholding Tax Certificates J1INCERT - Print
Transaction code: J1INCERT
By above PATH it will display the following screen:

In the above screen:


1) Company code
2) Fiscal Year
3) Business Place / Section code
4) Section
5) Posting dates

6) Bank Challan Numbers


7) Bank Challan Dates
8) Vendors
9) Certificate Date
10) Signatory
11) Designation
12) Place of Printing
Give all above information and click on execute button so it will display the following window:

- 365 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
In the above window to Output Device field give LP01 and flat check box Print
Immediately.
Now click on Print Preview. It will display the following report as TDS certufucate.

- 366 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 367 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

---------------------------------------------------***--------------------------------------------------

- 368 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 369 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Define Posting Keys and Posting Rules for Check Deposit


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Bank AccountingBusiness
TransactionsCheck DepositDefine Posting Keys and Posting Rules for Check Deposit
Database Tables: T028D, T028E, T033F, T033G, T033I, T033J
By the above PATH it will display the following box:

In the above box give your chart of accounts and pres on enter button or click on continue button
button so it will display the following
so it will display another screen. Now click on
screen:

In the above screen enter 3 account symbols like Main Bank, CheckDeposit, CheckIssue.
Pres enter button and save the activity.
Now click on Assign Accounts to Account Symbol under Dialog Structure right side of the
screen it will display the following screen click on
first:

- 370 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen we assigned G/L accounts to each account symbols which we created in first
step above.
button so
Save the activity and click on Create Keys for Posting Rules and click on
it will display the following screen:

In the above screen give new posting rule for checkdeposit clearing, pres enter button and click on
save button to save activity.
Now double click on Define Posting Rules and click on
following screen:

- 371 -

button so it will display the

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In this case General Entry will be as below:


SBI Check Deposit G/L a/c Dr
To Customer a/c

*****
*****

In the above screen:


Posting Rule
Posting Area

Posting Key
G/L
Acct Symbol
screen.
Document Type
Posting Type

: give the posting rule which we created in above screen in Create keys for
posting rules step
: It specifies whether the entry should post to Bank Accounts or to Sub
ledger Accounts
: The Posting Key indicates whether the entry should go with Debit side of
or Credit side of G/L.
: Give the right Account Symbol which we created in first step in above
It indicates the G/L account which should be posted
: It is which indicates the nature of entry
: Which specifies about Purpose of the entry posting. In the above case 8:
Clearing Credit Sub ledger Accounts.

Save the above screen and back to SPRO screen:


Create and Assign Business Transactions
PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Bank AccountingBusiness TransactionsCheck
Deposit Create and Assign Business Transactions.
Database Tables: T028H, T028I
In the following displayed screen click on
screen:

button so it will display the following

In the above screen:


Tran (Transaction): In this field you can give any new code
+ - Field
: in this field take + symbol if bank balance increases like check deposit to
house
- 372 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
bank and take - symbol when check issue that meat house bank balance
decreases.
Post.rule
: Posting rule which we created in above steps with relevant to transaction
assign in
this field.
In the above screen enter the parameters, save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

Define Variants for Check Deposit


PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Bank AccountingBusiness
TransactionsCheck DepositDefine Variants for Check Deposit
By the above screen it will display a screen on that click on new entries
the following screen:

button, it will display

In the above screen enter new variant, description in Name field and no of lines as 1.
Pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

2) Double
click on
this line

1) Enter Lgth
(Length) as 14 and
pres enter button

3) Change
this number
to 06

4) Click on this
continue button

In the above screen:


- 373 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

1. First enter 14 in Lgth field


2. Click on 10- DIGIT CHECK NUMBER line so it will display a small box as you saw
above
3. Change the Output Lgth to 06
4. Click on continue button or pres enter button
So it will insert a line under Fields of the Variant as below:

1) Double click
on this line

2) Click on this
continue button

In the above screen:


First pres Page Down button on the key board so Possible Fields in above screen will drage up
with other fields.
1. Double click on CUSTOMER NUMBER field so it will display the small box as above.
2. In the box dont change any Length just pres enter button or click on continue button.
It will add another line to fields of the variant as below

1) Double click
on this line

2) Click on this
continue button

- 374 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
In the above screen:

I.G.REDDY

1. Double click on INVOICE REFERENCE field so it will display the small box as above.
2. In the box dont change any Length just pres enter button or click on continue button.
It will add another line to fields of the variant as below

2) Click on this
continue button
1) Double click
on this line

In the above screen:


1. Double click on INVOICE DATE field so it will display the small box as above.
2. In the box dont change any Length just pres enter button or click on continue button.
It will add another line to fields of the variant as below
1) Double click
on this line

2) Click on this
continue button

In the above screen:


- 375 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

1. Double click on INVOICE DATE field so it will display the small box as above.
2. In the box dont change any Length just pres enter button or click on continue button.
It will add another line to fields of the variant.
Now click on save button to save the activity and take back to first screen as below:

In the above screen you can view your variant just created, keep the curser on that and click on
activate

button and back to SPRO screen.

- 376 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Post a sales invoice to customer

I.G.REDDY

To post one or moor sales transaction to customer use Transaction code: F-22
(For example assume I had posted an invoice to customer with an amount of Rs 15000/-)
View the Report
To view reports go to Transaction Code: FBL5N (Customer Line Items), FBL3N (G/L
Lineitems)
In these reports you can view openitem of customer invoices
Enter check Deposit
PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting Banks Incomings Check Deposit FF68 Manual Entry
Transaction Code: FF68
By above transaction it will display the following screen:

In the above screen:


Bank Key
Bank Account
Bank
Currency
Group
Transaction

: In this field enter your House Bank key (Check House Bank configuration)
: In this field enter your Check Deposit bank account number (Check House
configuration)
: Enter your Currency
: Any new identification for the activity
: The Check Deposit Transaction which your created in above step

With above details enter few other details like dates and other.
After entering above all parameters Go to menu bar Settings + Specifications so it will display
the following window:

- 377 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen:


Start Variant
Cust.Matchcode ID
Processing Type

: Select your variant which you created above step


: Select D which used to search customer by company code
: Select 4 which used to process the statement through online

Now pres enter button two times so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen:


Amount
Check
Customer
Inv.ref
Doc.date

: Amount of customer invoice (customer openitem)


: Check number which is given by customer
: Customer number
: Invoice document number
: Document date

After entering all items like above pres enter and save the screen it will automatically go back to
first screen as below:

- 378 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen go to menu bar Check deposit trans + Print + Individual list so it will display
the following window:

In the above window in Output Device field give LP01, flag check box Print Immediately
and click on Print preview. It will display the following screen:

Back to main screen.

- 379 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Again go to menu bar Check deposit trans + Post + Individual List so it will display the
following screen:

It shows no of items posted and information related errors in transaction.


Report
To view reports go to Transaction Code: FBL5N (Customer Line Items), FBL3N (G/L
Lineitems)
In these reports you can view cleared item of customer invoices

- 380 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 381 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
With this function, you can manually enter bank account statements you receive.
Statement entry is usually a two-step process:

First, you enter the account line items in the system. Various tools are available to help
you with this. You can vary the row format for entering individual transactions.
In addition, the system supports individual account determination and checks data
consistency.

The second step is to post the line items you have entered.
The account assignment variant can be changed at any time during processing. You can also enter
more than one value in an account assignment field. The system highlights account assignment
fields for which you do this.
When you enter your data, payment advices created in SAP Cash and Liquidity Management using
memo record entry can be automatically transferred to the bank statement.
There are various selection criteria for doing this. For example, you can select all payment advices
entered within a certain planning period or on a specific statement date.
When you process the data, you can delete from the entry screen any memo records that do not
match the bank account statement.
If you entered the wrong beginning or ending balance, you can correct it in the entry screen.
Posting Specifications
In the manual bank statement function, you can create up to two postings for each line item.

A bank account posting (for example, debit bank account and credit bank clearing
account)

A sub ledger posting (for example, debit bank clearing account and credit customer
account with clearing)
Define Posting Keys and Posting Rules for Manual Bank Statement
PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Bank AccountingBusiness
TransactionsPayment TransactionsManual Bank Statement Define Posting Keys and
Posting Rules for Manual Bank Statement
By the above PATH it will display the following box:

- 382 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
In the above box give your chart of accounts and pres on enter button or click on continue button
so it will display another screen. Now click on
button so it will display the following
screen:

In the above screen enter bank related transaction as Accounts Symbols in above activity.
Save the activity and double click on Assign Accounts to Account Symbol and click on
It will display the following screen:

In the above screen to all your Account Symbols assign respective G/L accounts.
Save the activity and click on Create Keys for Posting Rules and click on
So it will display the following screen:

- 383 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen create new posting rules as above.


Save the activity and double click on Define Posting Rules and click on
So it will display the following screen:

In the above screen the G/L entry will as below:


SBI Main Bank G/L a/c Dr
*****
To SBI Check Deposit G/L
*****
Fields should field as below:
Posting Rule

: give the posting rule which we created in above screen in Create keys for
posting rules step for check deposit.
Posting Area
: It specifies whether the entry should post to Bank Accounts or to Sub
ledger Accounts
Posting Key (Debit) : The Posting Key indicates whether the entry should go with Debit side of
G/L
or any other
Acct Symbol(Debit) : Give the right Account Symbol which we created in first step in above
screen.
It indicates the G/L account which should be posted at debit side
Acct Symbol(Credit) : Give the right Account Symbol which we created in first step in above
screen.
- 384 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
It indicates the G/L account which should be posted at Credit side
Document Type
: It is which indicates the nature of entry
Posting Type
: Which specifies about Purpose of the entry posting. In the above case 5:
Clearing Credit G/L Accounts.
After entering above all parameters click on next entry
screen:

button so it will display the following

In the above screen the G/L entry will as below:


SBI Check Issue Clearing G/L a/c Dr
To SBI Main Bank G/L a/c

*****
*****

Fields should field as below:


Posting Rule

: give the posting rule which we created in above screen in Create keys for
posting rules step for Check issue clearing.
Posting Area
: It specifies whether the entry should post to Bank Accounts or to Sub
ledger Accounts
Posting Key (Credit) : The Posting Key indicates whether the entry should go with Credit side of
G/L
or any other
Acct Symbol(Debit) : Give the right Account Symbol which we created in first step in above
screen.
It indicates the G/L account which should be posted at debit side
Acct Symbol(Credit) : Give the right Account Symbol which we created in first step in above
screen.
It indicates the G/L account which should be posted at Credit side
Document Type
: It is which indicates the nature of entry
- 385 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
Posting Type
: Which specifies about Purpose of the entry posting. In the above case 4:
Clearing Debit G/L Accounts.
After entering above all parameters click on next entry
screen:

button so it will display the following

In the above screen the G/L entry will as below:


Bank Charges G/L a/c Dr
*****
To SBI Main Bank G/L a/c *****
Fields should field as below:
Posting Rule

: give the posting rule which we created in above screen in Create keys for
posting rules step for Bank Charges.
Posting Area
: It specifies whether the entry should post to Bank Accounts or to Sub
ledger Accounts
Posting Key (Debit) : The Posting Key indicates whether the entry should go with Debit side of
G/L
or any other
Posting Key (Credit) : The Posting Key indicates whether the entry should go with Credit side of
G/L
or any other
Acct Symbol (Debit) : Give the right Account Symbol which we created in first step in above
screen.
It indicates the G/L account which should be posted at debit side
- 386 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
Acct Symbol (Credit) : Give the right Account Symbol which we created in first step in above
screen.
It indicates the G/L account which should be posted at Credit side
Document Type
: It is which indicates the nature of entry
Posting Type
: Which specifies about Purpose of the entry posting. In the above case 1:
Posting to G/L Account.
After entering above all parameters click on next entry
screen:

button so it will display the following

Fields should field as below:


Posting Rule

: give the posting rule which we created in above screen in Create keys for
posting rules step for Check Dishonor.
Posting Area
: It specifies whether the entry should post to Bank Accounts or to Sub
ledger Accounts
Posting Key (Credit) : The Posting Key indicates whether the entry should go with Credit side of
G/L
or any other
Acct Symbol (Credit) : Give the right Account Symbol which we created in first step in above
screen.
It indicates the G/L account which should be posted at Credit side
Document Type
: It is which indicates the nature of entry
Posting Type
: Which specifies about Purpose of the entry posting. In the above case 7:
Posting to G/L Account.

After entering above parameters click on save button to save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

- 387 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Create and Assign Business Transactions

I.G.REDDY

PATH: SPRO Financial Accounting (New) Bank Accounting Business Transactions


Payment Transactions Manual Bank Statement Create and Assign Business Transactions
Through above transaction it will display the following screen click on

In the above screen:


Tran (Transaction): In this field you can give any new code
+ - Field
: in this field take + symbol if bank balance increases like check deposit to
house
bank and take - symbol when check issue that meat house bank balance
decreases.
Post.rule
: Posting rule which we created in above steps with relevant to transaction
assign in
this field.
In the above screen enter the parameters, save the activity and back to SPRO screen.
Bank Statement
PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting Banks Incomings Bank Statement FF67 Manual Entry
Transaction Code: FF67

- 388 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 389 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

With the payment program you can process local and international payment transactions involving
your customers and vendors. With this program we can pay all vendor at a time(Who ever vendors
you want to involve in payment program)
Prerequisites
The Payment Methods, House Banks, and Forms you use must be defined or adapted before the
payment run is executed.
If the above-mentioned steps are to be carried out automatically, the payment program requires the
following information:

Rules according to which it can determine the open items to be paid and, if expedient,
group them together for payment. For example, you can specify grace periods for incoming
items, which are taken into consideration when calculating the due date.

Specifications for selecting the payee. You can enter an alternative payee in your
customer/vendor's master record or in the document itself.

Rules used by the payment program to select the payment methods. You can specify
payment methods via your customer or vendor's master record or via the open items, or you
can have the payment program select them using specified rules.

Rules used by the payment program to select the house bank from which the payment is
made. House banks are banks where your company (company code) maintains accounts.
You can specify a house bank in your customer/vendor's master record or in the line item,
or you can have the payment program select it using specified rules.

Specifications for automatic postings. The payment program requires information such as
document types, posting keys and accounts, in order to carry out the automatic postings.

You set the rules for controlling the payment program

In the customer/vendor master record

In the line items

via configuration of the payment program

With individual specifications for each payment run

Process Flow
1. It determines the open items to be paid and creates a proposal list. You can process the
proposal list on-line. Among other things, you can change payment methods or banks,
block items, or cancel payment blocks.
2. The payment program carries out payment using the proposal list. The payment run
includes only the open items contained in the proposal list. The payment program posts
documents and provides the data for the form printout and for creating the data carriers, the
payment advice notes and the payment summaries.
- 390 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

3. It uses the print program to print the forms and create the data carriers.

- 391 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Set Up All Company Codes for Payment Transactions

I.G.REDDY

In this activity, you make specifications for all company codes involved in payment transactions.
For each company code, you make the following specifications:
Sending company code:
The sending company code is the company code that is known to the business partner.
When making cross-company code payments, you can specify the sending company code as well
as the paying company code for each company code. If the sending company code is different from
the paying company code,
the system notes the sending company code in the payment transfer medium or payment advice.
This note is information for the business partner.
Furthermore, the sending company code affects how the system groups items from different
company codes into one payment. Items are only grouped into one payment for company codes
with the same paying company
code and the same sending company code.
If the sending company code is not specified, the system automatically regards the paying
company code as the sending company code.
Paying company code:
You assign a paying company code to each company code. This means that you can have one
company code process payment transactions centrally for several company codes.
Separate payment per business area
Use payment method supplements:
Select the field if you wish to use payment method supplements, and then define the payment
method supplements in the activity Define Payment Method Supplements. If you wish to display
the Payment method supplement field in the line item display for customers and vendors, you can
define the corresponding display variants. The same applies to the functions for displaying
payments and paid items when displaying payment
proposals. For this, choose the following activities:
Define Line Layout

Make Settings for Displaying Payments

Make Settings for Displaying Line Items

Cash discount and tolerance:


The payment program uses these entries to determine the cash discount strategy for the company
code.
Special G/L transactions:
Specify which special G/L transactions are to be settled for
customers and vendors.
Example: FPA
- 392 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
F = Down payment request
P = Payment request
A = Down payment on current assets

I.G.REDDY

PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts


PayableBusiness TransactionsOutgoing PaymentsAutomatic Outgoing PaymentsPayment
Method/Bank Selection for Payment ProgramSet Up All Company Codes for Payment
Transactions
Database Table: T042
Through above PATH it will display the screen click on

In the above screen maintain the parameters as I shown,


Save the screen and back to SPRO screen
Set Up Paying Company Codes for Payment Transactions
In this activity, you make the following specifications for the paying company codes:
Data for controlling the payment program:
Here you specify the minimum amount for which an incoming or outgoing payment is created, for
example. You can define additional amount limits for the payment method. To do so, choose the
activity Set Up Payment Methods per Company Code for Payment Transactions.
Specifications for paying with bills of exchange:
You can show or hide the settings for paying with bills of exchange.

Forms and sender details for advice notes and EDI accompanying sheets:
- 393 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
If you wish to print payment advice notes or an EDI accompanying sheet, specify the form name.
Specify also the SAP script text modules that contain details about the sender that are to be printed
on the payment advice note. You can go directly from this transaction to the transaction for editing
forms and text modules.
The standard system contains forms for payment advice notes and EDI accompanying sheets which
you can copy and adjust to meet your requirements.
PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts
PayableBusiness TransactionsOutgoing PaymentsAutomatic Outgoing PaymentsPayment
Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up Paying Company Codes for Payment
Transactions
Database Table: T042B, T042T
Through above PATH it will display the screen click on

In the above screen enter the above parameters and save the activity.
Back to SPRO screen.

- 394 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Set Up Payment Methods per Country for Payment Transactions

I.G.REDDY

The payment method specifies the procedure, such as check, transfer or bill of exchange, by which
payments are made.
The following payment methods are usual in Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable:
Payment Methods in the System
Accounts payable

Accounts receivable

Check

Bank collection

Transfer

Bank Direct Debit

Postal giro transfer

Refund by check

Bills of Exchange

Refund by bank
transfer

Check/bill of
exchange

Bank bills
Bill of exchange
payment request

You define the payment methods in two steps:


...

You first make all the specifications that are required for each payment method in each
country. This is necessary for all the payment methods used by your organization in each
country. If you have companies (company codes) in Germany, France and the USA for
example, you define the payment method "check" for each country.
You then define the payment methods you use for each company code. When in this
configuration function, you also specify the conditions of their use.

In this activity, you specify which payment methods are to be used in each country. You enter the
following details for the payment method:
Country-Specific Specifications for the Payment Method:

Payment method either for incoming or outgoing payments

Characteristics for classifying payment method: Here you specify the type of payment
method in question (such as check or bank transfer) and any other features of that payment
method (the payment method is used for personnel payments, for example). When you
select a payment method, only the characteristics that are appropriate for that payment
method are displayed. This means that you can only select fields that are relevant for the
selected payment method.

Required entries in master record: Here you determine which specifications in the
master record control whether the payment method is used (such as bank details or
collection authorization).
- 395 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Note: If the required details have not been entered in the master record, the payment method
cannot be used.

Posting specifications: You specify how the payment is to be posted, for example (such as
which document type is to be used).

You also specify which currencies are to be permitted, dependent on the country and payment
method. If you leave the currency table blank, this means that all currencies are permitted.
Note: If the payment method only allows payments in local currency, the system ignores any
currencies specified.
If you use the Payment Medium Workbench, read the documentation under Make Settings for
Payment Medium Formats from Payment Medium Workbench in the section Payment Media.
PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts
PayableBusiness TransactionsOutgoing PaymentsAutomatic Outgoing PaymentsPayment
Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up Payment Methods per Country for
Payment Transactions
Database Table: T042Z
Through above PATH it will display the screen click on

- 396 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen maintain above parameters,


Save the activity and back to SPRO screen:
Set Up Payment Methods per Company Code for Payment Transactions
In this activity, you specify which payment methods can be used per company code and determine
the conditions under which a payment method should be used.

Amount limits for payments within which the payment program can select the payment
method

Note: You always have to specify a maximum amount, otherwise the payment method cannot be
used. If you specify the payment method in an open item, the payment program ignores the
amounts you enter here.

Specifications for grouping items for payment (such as single payment for marked items)

Specifications for foreign/foreign currency payments

Specifications for optimizing bank selection

- 397 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Specifications for the form to be used for the payment medium

I.G.REDDY

Specifications for issuing payment advice notes

PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts


PayableBusiness TransactionsOutgoing PaymentsAutomatic Outgoing PaymentsPayment
Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up Payment Methods per Company Code for
Payment Transactions
Database Table: T042E
Through above PATH it will display the screen click on

In the above screen maintain required parameters as above.


Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.
Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions

In this activity, you make settings that the payment program uses to select the banks or bank
accounts from which payment is to be made. You define the following:
Ranking order of banks:
You specify which house banks are permitted and rank them in a list.
Bank accounts:
For each house bank and payment method (and currency, if required), you specify which bank
account is to be used for payments.
Available amounts:
For each account at a house bank, you enter the amounts that are available for the payment run.
You enter separate amounts for incoming and outgoing payments. Specifying available amounts
- 398 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
enables you to control which bank account is to be used for payments. You can specify the
amounts depending on the value date at the bank.
Value date:
You specify how many days elapse between the posting date of the payment run and the value date
at the bank, dependent on the payment method, bank account, payment amount, and currency. You
can have the system determine the value date, taking into account the bank calendar and any
individual arrangements made with
the bank. To do so, choose the activity Define Value Date Rules
Fees/Charges:
You define the charges that are printed on the bill of exchange forms (standard practice in Spain).
PATH: SPROFinancial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts
PayableBusiness TransactionsOutgoing PaymentsAutomatic Outgoing PaymentsPayment
Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up Bank Determination for Payment
Transactions
Database Table: T042A, T042D, T042I, T042V
Through above PATH it will display the screen click on
following window:

it will display the

In the above box enter your company code and click on continue button or click on enter button so
your company code will appears on the top as below:

In the above screen select your company code and click on Ranking order.
It will display another screen click on

- 399 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter required parameters and click on Bank Account
It will display another screen click on

In the above screen enter required parameters and click on Available Amounts
It will display another screen click on

In the above screen enter required parameters and click on Value Date
It will display another screen click on

- 400 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter required parameters and click on save button to save the activity, back to
SPRO screen.

- 401 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Assign Payment Method to Vendor Masters

I.G.REDDY

In the master record you can either:

Specify a single payment method, if, for example, you have already defined a specific
payment method with a business partner, or

Specify multiple payment methods, one of which will be selected by the payment program
according to your specifications during the payment run.

If you specify a payment method in the open items, it will override the specification in the master
record. A payment method defined in the open items must not exist in the master record.
The payment method with which you want to pay must always be specified in the customer or
vendor master record or in the open item.
NOTE: The following activity we have to do with all vendors or to those vendors to whom we
want to pay
through APP
Change Vendor Master Data
PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting Accounts Payable Master Records Maintain
Centrally XK02 Change
Transaction code: XK02

In the above screen enter your vendor number, company code, purchase organization and flag the
check box Payment Transactions so it will display the following screen:

- 402 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen assign your payment method to vendor master data which you created in above
steps.
Save the master data and back to easy access screen.
NOTE: assign your payment method to your all vendor master datas to whom you want to run the
APP program

Post open items or post purchase invoice using Transaction Code: F-43
Using above transaction code post purchase invoices to more than 1 vendor like 2 or 3
vendors
Look into the vendor report with Transaction Code: FbL1N
Looking into the G/L report with Transaction Code: FBL3N
In both cases you can view open items with all vendors and G/L
Now we have to run Automatic Payment Program to clear all vendors at a time through
check.

- 403 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY
RUN PAYMENT PROGRAM

Selection of the Payment Method by the Payment Program


Before every payment run you must specify which payment methods may be used in the payment
run. If a payment method is specified in open items or in the master record of the customer/vendor
and if that payment method is permitted for that payment run, the payment program selects this
payment method. The payment method in the open items takes precedence over any payment
method defined in the master record.
If several payment methods are specified in the master record and none in the item, then the
payment program selects a payment method. The program checks (in the sequence in which you
entered them) whether each of the payment methods you specified for the payment run can be
used. To be able to be used, a payment method must satisfy the following conditions (among
others):

The payment method must be specified in the customer/vendor master record or open
items.
The master record must contain the specifications needed for the payment method.
For foreign payments, the payment program checks whether the payment method in
question allows payments to customer/vendors or banks located abroad.
In the case of payments in foreign currency the payment method must be allowed for
foreign currency payments.
The permissible minimum and maximum amounts must be adhered to for the payment
amount.
For payment, a bank permissible for the payment method under consideration is
determined.

If one of the specified payment methods meets all the above conditions, this payment method is
used. Otherwise, the program carries out all the checks for the next payment method in the list you
entered.

PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting Accounts Payable Periodic Processing F110


Payments
Transaction Code: F110 Payments
By above PATH it will display the following screen:

- 404 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter:


Run Date: enter date when we running APP
Identification: in this field enter new code to identify the activity
Click on "PARAMETER" tab so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter:


Posting Date
entered.
Docs entered up to
open

: Enter the date on which date the payment should be


: The date which you enter in this field till that date the
items will be picked for the APP process.
- 405 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Customer item due by
open
Company code
Pmt Meths
above
Next p/date
the APP
Vendor
through

I.G.REDDY
: The date which you enter in this field till that date the
items will be picked for the APP process
: Enter your company code.
: Enter the Payment Method which you created in the
Steps.
: In this field enter the next date when you want to run
again.
: Enter all vendors numbers who you want to be paid
APP.

After entering above all parameters click on save button to save the activity.
Now click on "STATUS" tab so it will display previous screen on it click on
(Schedule proposal) button, so it will display the following window:

In the above screen flag the check box "Start Immediately" and pres enter button or click on
continue button.
It will display the following screen with following message:

In the above screen we can see the message was "Proposal is ready to be started"
Now click on enter button continuously till the above message changes like below:
- 406 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen the message changed as "Payment proposal has been created"
Now click on

button so it will display the following window:

In the above window select "All accounting clerks" and pres enter button or click on continue
button so it will display the following screen:

Double click on this


line item first

In the above screen double click on first line so it will display the following screen:

- 407 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Double click on this


line item first

In the above screen double click on first line so it will display the following window:

In the above window click on "Reallocate" so it will display the another window as below:

- 408 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above window enter:


Payment method
House Bank

: Enter your Payment Method as your created


: Enter your house bank and bank account

Now pres enter button or click on continue button so it will display another screen now click on
back button once it will take you to following screen:

In the above screen now you can see the green symbol (in round) that indicates, that amount is can
be paid.
The process we have to do with all payments to what ever the payment's to be done.
Now click on back button till we get following screen:

In the above screen under status tab you can see the new message "Payment proposal has been
edited",
- 409 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Now click on "Printout/data medium" so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter any variant to "RFFOAVIA" program and click on
so it will display the following screen:

Program run date


Identification Feature
Paying company code
No of sample printouts
Print immediately

: Enter the date when we are running this program


: Enter any new identification code
: Enter your company code
: Make it zero all ways
: flag this check box

In the above screen enter the parameters as i shown and click on


the following screen:

- 410 -

so it will display

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter text to "Meaning" field,


Click on save button to save the activity and click on back button till display the following screen:

In the above screen now enter any variant to "RFFOUS_C" program and click on
button
so it will display the following window:

- 411 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter the parameters like:


Program run date
Identification Feature
Paying company code
Payment Method
House bank
pay
Account ID
Check lot number

: Enter the date when we are running this program


: Enter any new identification code
: Enter your company code
: Enter your Company using Payment Method
: Enter your House Bank from which bank you want to
: Enter your SBI check issue bank ID
: Enter your House Bank Lot Number
- 412 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Currency
Print Control
No of sample printouts
Do not void any checks

I.G.REDDY
: Enter your company code currency
: Enter printer and flag all check all check boxes
: Make it zero
: Flag this check box

After entering all above parameters as i shown click on


following screen:

so it will display the

In the above screen enter text to "Meaning" field, and click on save button to save the activity now
click on back button2 times it will display the following scdreen:

Now again click on save button and click on "STATUS" button so it will display that status screen.
Click on
so it will display the following window:

- 413 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above window flag the check box "Create Payment Medium" and click on continue button or
click enter button so it will display the following message in status window as below:

In the above screen it display the message "Payment run is ready to be started" now pres enter
button till you get following window:

In the above screen the message will display as "Payment run has been carried out, Posting orders:
2 generated , 2 completed"
Now click on

so it will display the following window:

- 414 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above window in the "Job Name" field instead symbol "?" give some name or identification.
Now click on enter button or click on continue button so it will display the following message:

Now go to following PATH:

Go to menu bar "system + services + output control" so it will display the following screen:

- 415 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen just click on executive button so it will display the following screen:

Now in the above screen flag the check box and click on
display the following screen.

- 416 -

display content button so it will

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 417 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

The above two letters are the corresponding letters with check information to different vendors.
- 418 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Now check with vendor report the line items will be automatically cleared.
To check vendor line items go to transaction code: FBL1N

I.G.REDDY

Check also checks register as below:


PATH: Accounting Financial Accounting Accounts Payable Environment Check
Information Display FCHN - Check Register
By above PATH it will display the following screen:

in the above screen enter parameters and click on executive button so it will display the following
check information which we issued to vendor:

- 419 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 420 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY
Dunning Procedures

If the business partners may fall behind on payments you can send them a payment reminder or a
dunning notice to remind them of their outstanding debts.
The SAP System allows you to dun business partners automatically. The system duns the open
items from business partner accounts in which the overdue items create a debit balance. The
dunning program selects the overdue open items, determines the dunning level of the account in
question, and creates a dunning notice. It then saves the dunning data determined for the items and
accounts affected.
You can use the dunning program to dun both customers and vendors. It may be necessary to dun a
vendor if he or she has a debit balance as a result of a credit memo. If a customer is also a vendor,
you can offset the account balances against one another.
If you wish to use the automatic dunning procedure, you have to make settings in the following
places before using the system and while it is operational:

In Customizing for Financial Accounting (IMG)


In the master data for your customers or vendors
When you post documents

Once you have decided in which countries you wish to use the automatic dunning procedure, adjust
your settings to meet the country-specific business requirements. In the USA, for example, debtors
are not usually dunned. In Customizing, you can make company code-specific settings so that the
fields for dunning are hidden for the company code USA.
You use the following attributes to control the dunning program, and you can configure them
according to the needs of your company:

DUNNING PROCEDURE

The dunning procedure controls how dunning is carried out by the system. You can define as
many dunning procedures as you like.

DUNNING LEVEL

The dunning levels are calculated based on the number of days open items are in arrears. You
can also have the system calculate the dunning levels based on the dunning amount or a
percentage paid (sales-related dunning level determination).

You can determine more than one dunning level per dunning procedure.

DUNNING AREAS

A dunning area is an organizational unit within a company code used for the dunning process.
A dunning area can be a division or a sales organization. You assign a dunning area to an open
item when you are posting. You can dun items separately by dunning area.
- 421 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

The SAP System allows you to use either the automatic dunning program, which duns all overdue
items in accordance with your selection criteria, or, if required, you can dun individual customers
or vendors
You have the following options and functions for dunning:
Payment deadline, interest
arrears, and dunning charges

on You can enter a specific payment deadline in the


dunning notice, as well as interest on arrears and
dunning charges (both calculated by the dunning
program).
Dunning currency
If all the open items in an account have been
posted in the same currency - either local
currency or a foreign currency, the dunning
program uses this currency. Otherwise, the
dunning program uses the local currency of the
company code. The items are displayed in
document currency in the dunning notice, and
the totals in local and foreign currency.
Cross-company code dunning
You can combine the overdue items for one
customer or vendor from several company codes
in one dunning run, and issue the items in one
dunning notice.
Dunning for head office/branch If your customer or vendor has both a head
relationships
office and branch offices, dunning notices are
sent to the head office. However, you can also
send dunning notices to the branch offices.
Dunning one-time accounts
You can dun a one-time account just like any
other business partner account. All the items for
a one-time account that have the same address
are grouped in one dunning notice. The dunning
date and level are updated in the item, not in the
account master record.
Dunning history
The dunning history provides you with
information on all of the dunning runs you have
executed and the dunning notices you have sent
(overdue items, dunning totals, and so on). If
required, you can also select by account type,
company code, and/or customer or vendor.

- 422 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

STEP 1:
PATH: SPRO->Financial Accounting (New) ->Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) >Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable->Business Transactions->Dunning-> Dunning
Procedure-> Define Dunning Procedures.
Transaction code: FBMP
The following screen will appear:

Pres on New Procedure

the following screen appear and fill the required fields.

In the above screen enter:

Dunn.Procedure
Name
Dunning Interval in Days

: In this field enter new procedure code or any identification


: In this field give any description or text
: Enter the number days required between each dunning level
- 423 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
No.of dunning levels
: Enter required no of dunning levels (Max of 9 dunning levels)
Standard transaction dunning : flag this check box
Ref.Dunning procedur for texts: enter same identification which we enter in Dunn.procedure field
Now click on Dunning Levels

button so it will take to following screen.

in the above screen flag all check boxes against to 1. calculate interest, 2. Always dun, 3. Print all
items
now click on Charges Button

. It will display the following window.

In Currency field give required currency and click on continue button


appears.

- 424 -

.The following screen

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In above screen give dunning levels as many we maintain and charges for each dunning level as I
did in above screen
click on Minimum Amounts

button so it will go to the following screen.

It will display the following window.

In Currency field give required currency and click on continue button


appears.

.The following screen

In the above screen fill the required fields and click on Dunning texts
following window will appears.

button. The

- 425 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In this fill your company code and select Customer and click on continue button
screen appears.

In the above screen pres on New company code


widow as below:

.The following

button so it will display small

1102

Give your company code and continue button


screen.

so your company code will appears on top of

- 426 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Flag the check boxes of 1. Dunning by dunning area, 2. Separate notice per dunning level.
Save the screen and pres on back button.
Now click on Dunning texts

button the following window will appear.


Click on this F4 functionality so it will opens
another screen as follow.

If you click on this F4 functionality the following screen appears.

Click on this Dunning Form

If you click on above dunning form it will display the following screen.

- 427 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Now double click on Language EN Activ original language so it will copy the form
automatically to fields. as follow.

Now pres on back button

, so it will take to 1st screen now pres on save

button.

STEP 2:
Assign Dunning to Customer Master
TRANSACTION CODE: XD02
Not go to customer change screen (xd02) and assign dunning procedure to all the customer masters
to whom you want to be involved in dunning procedure as follow.
- 428 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

STEP 3:

TRANSACTION CODE: F-22


Not post some credit sales invoices in past dates to customers to whom you want to be involved in
this process.

RUN THE DUNNING PROCESS


The automatic dunning program runs according to the dunning process described below. It enables
you to regularly check your ledgers for overdue receivables, and then create payment reminders for
these business partners.
Process Flow
The dunning process consists of several sub processes that must be carried out in a specific order
(see figure below).

- 429 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Creating Dunning Proposals


Start the dunning program and enter the company codes for the dunning run. You can restrict the
selection to specific accounts. During the dunning run, the dunning program determines the
accounts and items that must be dunned, the dunning level, and all other details required for
dunning. The dunning program creates a dunning proposal list. The dunning proposal list can be
created as often as required since the dunning data for the item and in the account is not updated
until the dunning notices have been printed.
Only those accounts that contain a dunning procedure in the master record are included in the
dunning run.

Editing Dunning Proposals


You can edit the dunning proposal as follows:

Set dunning blocks


Reset dunning blocks
Change dunning levels

Printing Dunning Notices


The print program prints the dunning notices. At the same time, the relevant dunning data is stored
in the items and the master record of the business partner.
The dunning forms and texts that you use must be defined or adapted before the dunning run is
executed. You determine the items and accounts to be dunned and the dunning texts when you
- 430 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
configure the dunning program. This involves defining rules governing how the program
determines the data it needs.
During the dunning run, the dunning program determines all customer (and vendor) items and
accounts for which dunning notices can be issued. This is the basis of the dunning proposal.
The dunning proposal is output in the form of a list that contains all items and accounts for which
dunning notices can be issued (that is, they are overdue). The list is sorted according to account
and dunning level.
You can process the dunning proposal further.
Make sure that you have made the settings for the following features:

Dunning procedure
Company code data
Dunning data in the customer master record (or vendor master record)
Blocking of open items (if required)
Dunning parameters

You control the dunning program via the settings you make for the dunning procedure. Further
control can be exercised via the settings you make in the customer or vendor master record, via the
open items, and by the parameters for the dunning run.
You control dunning via:
Company Code-Specific Specifications:
One of the factors these specifications determine is which company codes are dunned.
Dunning Procedure
This contains the most important specifications for controlling dunning. These include the dunning
frequency, the dunning levels, and the grace days for the due date determination.
Customer/Vendor Master Record
In the master record, you specify which dunning procedure should be used for that account. The
dunning program stores the date of the last dunning run and the dunning level in the master record.
If an account is not to be dunned, enter a dunning block.

Open Items
You can block items from being dunned, or specify that an item is only to be dunned up to a
certain dunning level. The dunning program notes the date of the last dunning run for the item and
the dunning level.
The Parameters for the Dunning Run.

- 431 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
These include the company codes and accounts that are to be checked during the dunning run, and
the posting date up to which documents should be taken into account.
The automatic dunning program uses these criteria to check the items and accounts for the
following:

Whether they are overdue


Charges and interest
Dunning levels

The dunning program duns open items in customer and vendor accounts if the overdue items result
in a debit balance. When you configure the dunning program, you can specify additional criteria
for determining whether accounts or their open items are to be dunned.
You make the most important specifications via the dunning procedure. You define this procedure
with a four character alphanumeric key. It determines:
The dunning frequency and/or the dunning interval with which accounts are dunned.
The grace days and the minimum numbers of days in arrears for the purposes of determining
whether the open items and accounts should be dunned. This data is used only to determine the due
date of the open items and whether an account should be dunned.
The number of dunning levels. For each dunning level, you determine the number of days a line
item must be in arrears to be assigned a particular dunning level. This dunning level then
determines the wording of the dunning notice.
The transactions to be dunned. You can select whether standard and/or special G/L transactions
are dunned with the same procedure. Examples of special G/L transactions are payment requests,
bill of exchange payment requests, down payments, and down payment requests. Bill of exchange
payment requests are used in Spain, France, and Italy.
You can set up one or more dunning procedures. Several procedures are necessary if you want to
dun accounts differently according to the above mentioned criteria.
You specify which procedure is used for an account in the master record of the account concerned.
Enter this procedure in the company code-specific area.
Although you never send more than one payment reminder to certain of your customers, you send
up to three different dunning notices to all other customers. As a result, you define two dunning
procedures: A single-level procedure and a 3-level procedure. Enter the single level dunning
procedure in the master records of customers who should receive only one payment reminder.
Assign the 3-level dunning procedure to all other customers.

- 432 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
STEP 4:

I.G.REDDY

PATH: Accounting->Financial Account in->Accounts Receivable->Periodic Processing->F150


Dunning.
By the above PATH it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter information:


Run on
: Enter date when you are running the program
Identification : Enter any new identification name
In the above screen under Status box you can view the information message "No parameters
maintained"
After maintain above information click on "Parameter" tab so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen maintain parameters like:


- 433 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Dunning Date
Document posted up to
Company code
Customer

I.G.REDDY
: Give the date when you are running dunning program
: Give the date till the customers open items should be picked for the
dunning process
: Give your company code
: Give the customer range that whom you want to involve in the
dunning

After you maintain above parameters save the screen and click on status tab to go back.
It will display the following screen:

In the above screen the message under Status was changed to "Parameters were maintained"
Now click on

button so it will display the following window:

In the above window to "Output Device" field give "LP01" default printer and click on continue
button or click on enter button so it will display the following window:

- 434 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
In the above screen:
Start date
Start Immediately
Now click on

I.G.REDDY

: Maintain date
: Flag that check box
button so it will display the following window:

In the above screen under the Status window it will display the information like:
"Dun.Selection scheduled for 22.07.08 at 19.01.38
Dun.selection is scheduled"
now click on enter button till above message change as below:
"Dun.Selection scheduled for 22.07.08 at 19.01.38
Dun.selection is complete"
It will display the following window with different options:

in the above window click on

button so it will display the following small window:

- 435 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Just pres enter key or click on continue button so it will display the following list screen:

The above screen will display all list of invoices and othe details which are coming into dunning
process in this program:
Now click on back button so go back to main screen and click on
display the following small window:

so it will

In the above window to "Output Device" field give "LP01" default printer and click on continue
button or click on enter button so it will display the following window:

- 436 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen just click on "Print" button so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen under Status window it will display new message as:
"Dun.printout scheduled for 22.07.08 at 19:13:27
Dun.printout is scheduled"
Now click on enter button till the above message changes as below:
"Dun.printout scheduled for 22.07.08 at 19:13:27
Dun.printout is complete"
so it will display the following screen:

in the above screen click on "Dunn.history" button so it will display the following screen:
- 437 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen:


Account type
Company code
Customer

: In this field give customer id "D"


: Give your company code
: Give Customer range who are involved in dunning

After entering above information click on executive button so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen keep your curser on customer line item and click on
So it will display the following window:

In the above screen click on

so it will display 1st dunning letter as below:

- 438 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

the above letter is 1st dunning letter to display next dunning letter click on back button till you get
following screen:

In the above screen click on

so it will display the following window:

- 439 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Enter "Output Device" as "LP01" and click on continue button so it will display the following
screen

In the above window:

Company code
Customer
Run on
Dunning date
Document posting up to

: Give your company code


: Give your customer to whom you are running 2nd dunning letter
:
:
Enter future dates (according to the intervals maintain between
dunning levels)
:

After maintaining above information click on


another dunning letter.

button so it will display the following

- 440 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 441 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 442 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 443 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Activities Required in Enterprise Structure, Assignment

I.G.REDDY

1) Define Sales Organization


2) Define Distribution Channel
3) Maintain sales office
4) Maintain sales group
5) Define Shipping Point
6) Assign sales organization to company code
7) Assign distribution channel to sales organization
8) Assign division to sales organization
9) Set up sales area
10) Assign sales office to sales area
11) Assign sales group to sales office
12) Assign sales organization - distribution channel plant
13) Assign sales area to credit control area
14) Define Rules By Sales Area
15) Assign shipping point to plant
Define Condition Types
PATH: SPROSales and DistributionBasic FunctionsPricingPricing ControlDefine
Condition Types
Transaction code: VOK0
Database Table: T685, T685A, T685T
By above transaction it will display the following screen:

In the above screen click on Maintain Condition Types. So it will display the following screen:
In the following screen click on

button, so it will display the following screen:

- 444 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen maintain parameters like Access sequence, Condition type, Condition class,
Calculation type, Condition Category and click on
It will display the following new screen:

- 445 -

(Next) button.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

the above screen maintain parameters like Access sequence, Condition type, Condition class,
Calculation type, Condition Category and click on
It will display the following new screen:

- 446 -

(Next) button.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

the above screen maintain parameters like Access sequence, Condition type, Condition class,
Calculation type, Condition Category and click on
It will display the following new screen:

- 447 -

(Next) button.

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

the above screen maintain parameters like Access sequence, Condition type, Condition class,
Calculation type, Condition Category and click on
(Save) button to save the activity.
Back to SPRO screen.
Define Access Sequences
PATH: SPROSales and DistributionBasic FunctionsPricingPricing ControlDefine
Access Sequences.
Transaction Code: VOKX

By above transaction it will display the following screen:

- 448 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen double click on Maintain Access Sequences.


It will displays a screen on that click on
An small box will appears as below:

In the above box provide Access Sequence as MWST and click on enter button.
It will display Access Sequence on the top of window as below:

In the above screen select MWST and click on Accesses under Dialog Structure.
So it takes to another screen click on
so it will display as below:

- 449 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen give 40 to NO field and 368 to TAB field and pres enter button twice.
Now select your line which you enter above and click on Fields under Dialog Structure so it will
display following screen:

Just save the activity and back to SPRO screen.


Define And Assign Pricing Procedures

PATH: SPROSales and DistributionBasic FunctionsPricingPricing Control Define


And Assign Pricing Procedures
Transaction Code: DFP4
Database table: T683, T683S, T683T, T683U
By above transaction it will display the following screen:

In the above screen double click on Maintain Pricing Procedures.


It will display a screen on that click on
A small box will appear as below:

.
- 450 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen give RVAA01 for Procedure field and pres enter button so it will appears
at the top of window:

In the above screen select Procedure RVAA01 and click on


following screen:

copy button so it will display the

In the above first change the name of Procedure, Description and click on enter button so it will
display another small window as I shown above on that click on Copy all it will display an
information message box just click enter button. It will also display few warning messages just
keep pressing enter button and at last save the activity.
It will display the following screen

- 451 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen select your pricing procedure and click on Control Data under Dialog
Structure.

In the above screen:


1) To select all steps click on select all button
2) Now De-Select required steps as I given step numbers below:
STEP
CTYP
Description
a. 11 - PR00 - Price
b. 101 - KA00 - Sales Promotion
c. 104 - K007 - Customer Discount
d. 105 - K004 - Material
e. 908 - Net Value
f. 940 - VPRS - Cost
g. 950 - Profit Margin
3) After you De-Select above Condition types now click on Delete button . So all selected
Condition types will be deleted and De-Selected conditions will be there only.
4) Now save the activity and click on
button in the same screen.
- 452 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

It will display the following screen:

In the above screen we assign the Condition, Fro (From), To value and save the activity and back
to SPRO screen.
Define pricing Procedure Determination
PATH: SPROSales and DistributionBasic FunctionsPricingPricing Control Define
And Assign Pricing Procedures
Transaction Code: OVKK
Database table: T683, T683S, T683T, T683U, T683V
By above transaction it will display the following screen:

In the above screen double click on Define Pricing Procedure Determination.


so it will display another screen in that click on
it will go with following screen:

- 453 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen we assign value like:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Sales organization
Distribution Channel
division
Document Pricing Procedure
Customer pricing Procedure
Pricing Procedure
Condition Type

After entering all above values save the screen and back to SPRO screen.

Define Tax Determination Rules


PATH: SPRO Sales and DistributionBasic FunctionsTaxesDefine Tax Determination
Rules
Transaction Code: DFS1
Database Table: TSTL
By above transaction it will display the following screen click on
following screen:

it will go with

In the above screen we assigned our Tax Conditions to country.


Save the activity and back to SPRO screen:
Define Regional Codes
PATH: SPRO Sales and DistributionBasic FunctionsTaxes Define Regional Codes
- 454 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Transaction Code: OK09


Database Table (Regional Codes): T005E, T004F
Database Table (City Codes): T685, T685A, T685T
By the above screen it will display the following screen:

In the above screen double click on Define County Code.


Click on
in displayed screen as below:

Save the activity and click on back button till you get following screen:

In the above screen double click on Define City Code


Click on
in displayed screen as below:

- 455 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter above values.


Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.
Assign Delivering Plants For Tax Determination
Define Regional Codes
PATH: SPRO Sales and DistributionBasic FunctionsTaxes Assign Delivering Plants For
Tax Determination
Transaction Code: OVK6
Database Table: T001W
it will display the

By the above screen it will displays a screen now click on


following box:

In above box enter you plant number and click on enter button so it will display on top to window
as below:

In the above screen select your plant and click on details button
So it will display the following screen:

- 456 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

To assign Country, City


code click on F4 function
an assign.

In the above screen assign Country Code, City Code.


Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

- 457 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Define Tax Relevancy Of Master Records

I.G.REDDY

PATH: SPRO Sales and DistributionBasic FunctionsTaxes Define Tax Relevancy Of


Master Records
Transaction Code: OVK3
Database Table: TSKD, TSKDT
By the above transaction it will display the following screen:

In the above screen double click on Customer Taxes, it will display other screen:
Click on
in displayed screen as below:

In the above screen maintain values as I shown.


Save the activity and click on back button till you get following screen:
Transaction Code: OVK4
Database Table: TSKM, TSKMT

- 458 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen double click on Material Taxes, it will display other screen:
Click on
in displayed screen as below:

Enter the above values, save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

Check Master Data Relevant For Account Assignment


PATH: SPROSales and Distribution Basic Functions Account Assignment/Costing
Revenue Account Determination Check Master Data Relevant For Account Assignment
Transaction Code: OVK5
Database Table: TVKM, TVKMT

- 459 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen double click on Materials: Account Assignment Groups so it will display the
following screen
Click on
in displayed screen as below:

In the above screen enter values and save the activity.


Click on back button till you get following screen:
Transaction Code: OVK8
Database Table: TVKT, TVKTT

In the above screen double click on Customers: Account Assignment Groups so it will display
the following screen
Click on
in displayed screen as below:

- 460 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above enter relevant values.


Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.
Define And Assign Account Keys
PATH: SPROSales and Distribution Basic Functions Account Assignment/Costing
Revenue Account Determination Define And Assign Account Keys
Transaction Code: OK11
Database Table: T687, T687T

In the above screen double click on Define Account Key, so it will display the following screen:
Click on
in displayed screen as below:

In the above screen enter values as above.


Save the activity and click on back button till you get the following screen:

- 461 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Database Table: T683S

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen double click on Assign Account Key, so it will display the following screen:
Click on

in displayed screen as below, it will display small box as below:

In the above box enter the required information and pres enter button so your pricing procedure
will appears at the top of screen as below:

In the above screen enter Account Keys to ActKy field which we prepare in the first step and
save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

Assign G/L Accounts


PATH: SPROSales and Distribution Basic Functions Account Assignment/Costing
Revenue Account Determination Assign G/L Accounts
- 462 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Transaction Code: OK15


Database Table: C001
By above transaction code it will display the following screen:

In the above screen select 1 Cust.Grp/Material Grp/AcctKey and click on details button
double click on that line.
So it will display another screen as below:
Click on
:

In the above screen the entries are:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Application
Condition Type
Chart of Accounts
Sales Organization
Account Assignment Group for Customer
Account Assignment Group for Material
Account key
G/L Account.

In the above screen we assign the relevant G/L account with respect to Account key.
Save the activity and back to previous screen as below:

- 463 -

or

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

So it will display another screen as below:


Click on
:

In the above screen maintain parameters like:


1. Application
2. Condition Type
3. Chart of account
4. Sales Organization
5. G/L Account
Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.
Assign Shipping Points
PATH: SPROLogistics ExecutionShippingBasic Shipping FunctionsShipping Point and
Goods Receiving Point DeterminationAssign Shipping Points
Transaction Code: VOL2
Database Table: TVSTZ
By the above transaction code it will display the following screen, so click on

- 464 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Enter the above values and save the screen. Back to SRO screen.

I.G.REDDY

Partner Determination
PATH: SPRO Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Partner Determination Set Up
Partner Determination
Transaction Code: VOPA
Database Table: TKUPA, TPAER, TPAKD, TVPAG, TVPG
By the above transaction the following screen will display:

In the above screen double click on Set up Partner Determination for Customer Master so it will
display the following screen click on
and provide following information:

In the above screen provide Part.Det.Proc with 4 digit code and save the activity.
Now select your Partner determination and double click on Partner Functions in Procedure under
Dialog Structure.
It will display the following screen, on that click on
.

- 465 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above you assign partner functions pres enter and save the activity.
Now double click on Partner Determination Procedure Assignment
It will display the following screen; on that click on
following small box:

it will display the

In this box give your customer account group and click on enter button so it will appear on the top
of the screen as below:

In the above screen you assign Partner determination to Account group, save the activity.
Now double click on Account Groups Function Assignment under Dialog Structure.
It will display another screen in that click on
so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen we assign partner functions to Account Group.


Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.
- 466 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Creation of Customer Master


PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingAccounts ReceivableMaster RecordsMaintain
CentrallyXD01 Create
Transaction Code: XD01
The customer master is under 3 mages categories:
1) General Data
a) Address
b) Control Data
c) Payment Transaction
d) Marketing
e) Unloading Points
f) Export Data
g) Contact Person
2) Company Code Data
a) Account Management
b) Payment Transaction
c) Correspondence
d) Insurance
3) Sales Area Data
a) Sales
b) Shipping
c) Billing Document
d) Partner functions
Click on above transaction it will display the following screen:
1) Click on this Account
Group Overview button.

3) Double click on
this Group code

2) Type your customer


Account group

In the above screen click on Account Group Overview Button so it will display the another screen
as I shown above.
- 467 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
In the second screen enter your Account Group and pres enter button.
Your Customer account group will appear on the top of the screen just double click on the that.
The following screen will appear:

Enter your company code


1) Click on this button
3) Double click on this sales organization

2) Enter your Sales organization


code

1102

In the above screen enter your company code.


Click on All Sales areas button, so it will display another screen as above.
Enter your sales organization in the field and pres enter button. It will display your sales
organization at the top of screen.
Now double click on your sales organization it will display the following screen.

- 468 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Now pres enter button or click on continue button.
It display customer master screen as below:

I.G.REDDY

In the above we enter the customer address or communication details under Address tab.
Click on Payment Transactions tab and values as below:

In the above screen enter customer bank details under Payment Transactions tab
Now pres on Company Code Data button it will display the following screen:

- 469 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter Recon.Account, Sort Key under Account Management tab and
click on Payment Transactions tab, values as below:

In the above screen enter House Bank under Payment Transactions tab, now click on Sales
Area Data button it will display as below

- 470 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen provide all required information as I shown above under Sales tab and click
on Shipping tab, and values as below:

In the above screen provide all required information as I shown above under Shipping tab and
click on Billing Documents tab, and values as below:

- 471 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen provide all required information as I shown above under Billing Documents
tab and click on Partner Functions tab, and values as below:

In the above screen as we maintain Partner determination the partner functions will assigh
automatically.
Now save the customer master.
It will issue the following message:
- 472 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Back to easy access screen.


Maintain Company Codes for Materials Management
PATH: SPRO Logistics GeneralMaterial MasterBasic SettingsMaintain Company
Codes for Materials Management
Transaction code: OMSY
By the above transaction it will display a screen in it click on
display the following box:

so it will

In the above box enter your company code and pres enter button.
Your company code will appears on the top of screen as below:

In the above screen against to your company code enters:


1. Fiscal Year
2. Period (the month which you are working now)
3. Flag the check box ABp
Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.
Define Attributes of Material Types
PATH: SPRO Logistics GeneralMaterial MasterBasic Settings Material Types
Define Attributes of Material Types
Transaction code: OMS2
Database table: T134M
- 473 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

By the above transaction it will display a screen in it click on


display the following box:

so it will

In the above box enter Material Type FERT and pres enter button.
The material Type FERT will appears on the top of screen as below:

In the above screen select MTyp - FERT and double click on Quantity/Value updating under
Dialog structure.

so it will display the following box:

It will display another screen click on

In the above box enter Valuation Area (Your Plant Code) and pres enter so it will appears at top
of screen as below:

- 474 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen against to your Valuation Area and Material type flat the 2 check boxes Qty
Updating, Value updating.
Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

- 475 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Define Material Groups

I.G.REDDY

PATH: SPRO Logistics GeneralMaterial Master Settings for Key Fields Define
Material Groups
Transaction code: OMSF
Database table: T023, T023T
By the above transaction it will display a screen in it click on
following Screen:

so it will display the

In the above screen enter material group name and description.


Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

Plant Parameters
PATH: SPRO Materials Management Inventory Management and Physical Inventory Plant
Parameters
Database Table: T159L
By the above transaction it will display a screen in it click on
following Screen:

- 476 -

so it will display the

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter shown parameters.


Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

- 477 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Group Together Valuation Areas

I.G.REDDY

PATH: SPRO Materials Management Valuation and Account Assignment Account


Determination Account Determination Without Wizard Group Together Valuation Areas
Transaction code: OMWD
It will display an screen click on

so it will display the following box:

In the above box enter Valuation Area (Your Plant Code) and pres enter so it will appear at top
of screen as below:

In the above screen assign 0001 as Valuation Grouping Code to your Valuation Area (Plant).
Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.
Configure Automatic Postings
PATH: SPRO Materials Management Valuation and Account Assignment Account
Determination Account Determination without Wizard Configure Automatic Postings
Transaction code: OMWB, OBYC
In the following window just click on Cancel button.

- 478 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

It will display the following screen:

In the above screen click on Account Assignment so will display the following screen:

In the above screen double click on AUM Expense/Revenue from stock Transfer

In the box enter your Chart of Account and click enter button it will display the following screen:

In the above screen flag the check boxes of Debit/Credit, Valuation Modif, Valuation Class and
save the screen and click on Accounts Button. It will display the following screen:

- 479 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter values as I shown, save the activity and back to following screen as
below:

In the above screen double click on BSV Change in Stock Account

In the box enter your Chart of Account and click enter button it will display the following screen:

- 480 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen flag the check boxes of Debit/Credit, Valuation Modif, Valuation Class and
save the screen and click on Accounts Button. It will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter values as I shown, save the activity and back to following screen as
below:

In the above screen double click on BSX Inventory Posting

- 481 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the box enter your Chart of Account and click enter button it will display the following screen:

In the above screen flag the check boxes of Debit/Credit, Valuation Modif, Valuation Class and
save the screen and click on Accounts Button. It will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter values as I shown, save the activity and back to following screen as
below:

- 482 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen double click on GBB Offsetting Entry for Inventory Posting

In the box enter your Chart of Account and click enter button it will display the following screen:

In the above screen flag the check boxes of General Modification, Valuation Modif, Valuation
Class and save the screen and click on Accounts Button. It will display the following screen:

- 483 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter values as I shown, save the activity and back to following screen as
below:

In the above screen double click on PRD Cost (Price) Differences

In the box enter your Chart of Account and click enter button it will display the following screen:

- 484 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen dont flag any of the check boxes just Save the screen and click on Accounts
Button. It will display the following screen:

- 485 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Creation of Finished good Material

I.G.REDDY

PATH: Logistics Materials Management Material Master Material Create (General)


MM01 Immediately.
Transaction Code: MM01
With the above transaction it will display the following screen:

In the above screen select Industry Sector, Material type


Now click on Select View(S), so it will display the following screen:

- 486 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
In the above screen select the views as I shown click on Default Values and click on enter button
or continue key it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter the values as I shown click on Default Values and click on enter
button or continue key it will display the following screen:

- 487 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
In the above screen under Basic Data 1 tab enter required values and click on enter button so it
will display next tab as below:

In the above screen under Sales: sales org.1 tab maintain other values and click on Conditions
button so it will display the following screen:

- 488 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
In the above screen maintain conditions like 1- Liable for tax, 2 Exemption from Tax, click on
Main Data button so will display main screen now click enter button so it will display the
following screen:

In the above screen under Sales: General/Plant tab enter required values and click on enter
button so it will display next tab as below:

In the above screen under MRP 1 tab enter required values and click on enter button so it will
display next tab as below:

- 489 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen under Forecasting tab enter required values and click on enter button so it
will display next tab as below:

In the above screen under Work scheduling tab enter required values and click on enter button so
it will display next tab as below:

- 490 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen under Accounting 1 tab enter required values and click on enter button so it
will display next tab as below:

In the above screen under Costing 1 tab enter required values and click on save button to save
the Material it will give you following message with material number:

In the above message we can find material number that will be used in further process.
Back to easy access screen.
- 491 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 492 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Maintain Condition Records

I.G.REDDY

PATH: LogisticsSales and DistributionMaster DataConditionsSelect Using Condition


TypeVK11 Create
Transaction Code: VK11
By the above transaction it will display the following screen:

In the a above screen enter condition type PR00 - price and pres enter button.
It will display the following screen:

In the above window select radio button Material with Release Status and pres enter button so it
will display the following screen:

Enter the above parameters and save the screen.


Click on back button once so it will display the following screen:

- 493 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter condition type K004 Material Discount


Pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

Enter the above parameters and save the screen.


Click on back button once so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter condition type 1005 1105 Excise Duty Payable
Pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

In the above window select radio button Country/Plant Reqion/Region/TaxcI1cust/TaxcI.Mat


and click enter button so it will display the following screen:
- 494 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Enter the above parameters and save the screen.


Click on back button once so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter condition type 1006 Cess Payable


Pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

In the above window select radio button Country/Plant Reqion/Region/TaxcI1cust/TaxcI.Mat


and click enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 495 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Enter the above parameters and save the screen.
Click on back button once so it will display the following screen:

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter condition type 1007 VAT Payable


Pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

In the above window select radio button Country/Plant Reqion/Region/TaxcI1cust/TaxcI.Mat


and click enter button so it will display the following screen:

Enter the above parameters and save the screen.


Click on back button once so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter condition type 1008 CST Payable


Pres enter button so it will display the following screen:
- 496 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above window select radio button Country/Plant Reqion/Region/TaxcI1cust/TaxcI.Mat


and click enter button so it will display the following screen:

Enter the above parameters and back to Easy access screen.

- 497 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Creation of Sales Order

I.G.REDDY

PATH: Logistics Sales and Distribution Sales Order VA01 - Create


Transaction Code: VA01

In the above screen enter those parameters and click enter button it will display the following
screen:

Select this line and double


click on the same

In the above screen enter customer number to Sold-to-Party mateirla number to Material field
and quantity to Order Quantity field pres enter button.
Now select the line and double click on the same line it will display the following screen:

- 498 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen you can view the price, discount, taxes details of the order.
Now save the order so it will display the following message:

In the above message it shoes order number as 12088 make a note of that.
Back easy access screen.
Goods Receipt posting (Entry of Stock Balances)
PATH: Logistics Materials Management Inventory Management Goods Movement
Goods Receipt MB1C Other.
Transaction Code: MB1C

In the above screen enter Movement type, Plant, Storage Location and pres enter button so it will
take you to another screen as below:

- 499 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen enter material number and quantity of goods.


Pres enter button and save the activity.
So the finished good will update.
Back to easy access screen.

Outbound Delivery
PATH: LogisticsSales and DistributionShipping and TransportationOutbound
DeliveryCreateSingle DocumentVL01N - With Reference to Sales Order
Transaction Code: VL01N

In the above screen enter:


Shipping point
Selection date (NOTE: this date should be at least one week future date)
Order (The Order number which deliver when you raised sales order in above
step)
After enter the above parameters pres enter button, so it will display the followings screen:

- 500 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

In the above screen just click on Picking tab, the below screen will display:

In the above screen under Picking tab enter Picked Qty(Picking quantity)
Now click on Post Goods Issue

When you click on Post Goods Issue it will automatically post and issue above screen.
Back to easy access screen.
Billing Document
PATH: LogisticsSales and DistributionBillingBilling DocumentVF01 Create
Transaction Code: VF01

In the above screen give date, document no which you got from above step (goods issue)
Click on execute button or pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 501 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

Just save the above document


It will post to respective GLs
Customer Report
PATH: AccountingFinancial AccountingAccounts ReceivableAccountFBL5N Display/Change Line Items
Transaction Code: FBL5N / FS10N
By above transaction it will display the following screen:

- 502 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
In the above screen select the parameters and executive the activity it will display the following
screen:

In above screen you can view the open items with Document Type RV which are posted with SD
integration.
To clear those open items use Transaction Code F-28

- 503 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 504 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 505 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

1. What is difference between company and company code?


2. What are all fields appear in configuration of company code?
3. What is Business area? Do we assign Business Area to C.Code?
4. What is Consolidation Business Area?
5. What are the Organisational Elements that are Assign to C.Code?
6. What if Fiscal year Variant?
7. What are the types of Fiscal year Variant?
8. What are Year Dependent and Year Independent?
9. What is difference between Configuration and Customisation?
10. What is C.Code to Productive?
11. What is Posting Periods?
12. What is Document Number Ranges?
13. What is Document Type?
14. What is Tolerance?
15. What is Posting Key?
16. What is Field Status?
17. In how many levels Field Status can be maintain in GL?
18. What is Base Line Date?
19. What are Priority levels of Fields Status?
20. What is Chart of Accounts?
21. How many Chart of Accounts we can assign to C.Code?
22. What is Recurring Entries?
23. What are types of Chart of Accounts?
24. What is the use of Group Chart of Account?
25. What information dose Chart of Accounts contain?
26. What are all fields appear in configuration of Chart of Accounts?
27. What are all the Screens available in FS00?
28. What all the fields appear in FS00 screen? And what is the peruse of each?
29. How many Currencies we can maintain in one C.Code and what are they?
30. What Direct Quotation and Indirect Quotation in Currencies?
31. What are the steps for Balance Interest Calculation?
32. What Time-Dependent Terms in Interest Calculation?
33. When you have multiple Reference Interest Rates what is basic Condition?
34. What is Item Interest Calculation?
- 506 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
35. What is House Bank?

I.G.REDDY

36. What is Addition ledger? How do we maintain that?


37. What is Validation? Explain steps with example?
38. What is Subscription? Explain steps with example?
39. How many maximum line items can you post in one transaction?
40. What are the month end activities?

41. What T.Code for APP Configuration.


42. Explain all APP steps.
43. What is NEXT DATE in APP? How it helps in APP?
44. What are the configurations to avoid a certain region vendors in APP program?
45. What are the configurations to pay vendor through certain bank (Referred by Vendor)?
46. What are the steps followed to run APP?
47. How can we find whether all vendors all selected are not?
48. Explain Tax on Sales and Purchase?
49. Explain configuration steps to calculate tax include of Tax on Sales and Purchase?
50. Explain Payment terms?
51. Explain Item Interest Calculation.
52. What is aging enlaces?
53. What are the month end activities?

54. What is Dunning?


55. What are the Configuration steps for Dunning?
56. How many levels we can maintain in Dunning?
57. What is credit management?
58. Bad Debit configuration?
59. What is Payment Terms? How do you maintain that?
60. What is the purpose of W/tax type Step?
61. How to configure the Education cess in w/tax?
62. What Check Deposit Process?
63. What are all the steps to prepare BRS?
64. What are the month end activities?

65. Complete steps in FI and MM integration?


- 507 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
66. What are all the GL a/cs that will affect in complete FI and MM integration flow?
67. What are all the General Entry in each step of FI and MM integration?
68. Where do we maintain periods in MM?
69. Where do we assign GL a/cs for MM? What is T.Code and what are the A/C
Determination points? (For ex., WRX, BSX)
70. What are the tolerance limits for MM?
71. Complete steps in FI and SD Integration?
72. What are all the GL a/cs that will affect in complete FI and SD integration flow?
73. What are all the General Entry in each step of FI and SD integration?

- 508 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY
SAF FI Technical Interview Questions

1. Tell me about FI Organizational structure?


Ans: Client
|
Operating Concern
|
Controlling area1 Controlling Area 2
|
Co. Code 1 Co. Code 2
|
Bus area 1 Bus area2 Bus Area3 Bus Area 4
2. How many Normal and Special periods will be there in fiscal year, why do u use special
periods?
Ans: 12 Normal posting period and 4 special periods are in the fiscal year which can be used for
posting tax and audit adjustments to a closed fiscal year.
3. Where do you open and close periods?
Ans: PPV is used to open and close the periods based on a/c types considering GL Accounts. Tr.
Code. OB52.
4. What do you enter in Company code Global settings?
Ans:

4 digit Alphanumeric key.


Name of the company
City
Country
Currency
Language
Address

5. What is document type, and what does it control? Examples.


Ans: Document type is nothing vouchers containing line items. Several business transac! tions can
be identified within a particular document type. It controls the document number ranges. It controls
the Header part of document IT controls the line item level of the document Helps filing of
physical document
6. What is posting key and what does it control?
Ans: These are special classification keys. Two character numerical key it controls the entry of line
items. Posting key determines Account type, Debit/credit posting, Field status of transaction.
7. What is field status group, what does it control?

- 509 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
Ans: FSG is mandatory field in ! GL Creation. You use this field to define which fields are
displayed when you post business transactions to a G/L account. A field may have one of the
following statuses.
-

Suppressed
Display
Optional
Required

8. What is chart of account and how many charts of accounts can be assigned to a company?
Ans: Chart of account is a list of all G/L accounts used by one or several company codes. For each
G/L account, the chart of accounts contains the account number, account name, and the
information that controls how an account functions and how a G/L account is created in a
Company code. You have to assign a chart of accounts to each company code. This chart of
accounts is the Operating chart of accounts and is used for the daily postings in this company code.
You have the following options when using multiple company codes. You can use the same chart
of accounts for all company codes If the company codes all have the same requirements for the
chart of
accounts set up, assign all of the individual company codes to the same chart of accounts. This
could be the case if all company codes are in the same country. In addition to the operating chart
of accounts, you can use two additional charts of accounts If the individual company codes need
different charts of accounts, you can assign up to two charts of accounts in addition to the
operating chart of accounts. This could be the case if company codes lie in multiple countries. The
use of different charts of accounts has no effect on the balance sheet and profit and loss statement.
When creating the balance sheet or the profit and loss statement, you can choose whether to
balance the co! mpany codes which use different charts of accounts together or separately.
9. What does definition of a chart of account contains?
Ans: chart of account key
Name
Maintenance language
Length of the GL Account Number
Controlling Integration
Group chart of accounts (Consolidation)
Block Indicator
10. Can one COA be assigned to several companies?
Ans: yes. One COA can be assigned to several companies.
11) What is account group and what does it control?
Ans: Account group determines which fields you can configure on the G/L master record. It is
necessary to have at least two one for B/S and another one for P&L a/c. It controls the Number
ranges of GL A/C. The status of fields of the master record of GL belongs to company code area.
12) What is reconciliation account; can you directly enter documents in that a/c?

- 510 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
Ans: When you p! ost items to a subsidiary ledger, the system automatically posts the same data to
the general ledger. Each subsidiary ledger has one or more reconciliation accounts in the general
ledger.We can't use reconciliation account for direct postings.
13) How do you control field status of GL master records and from where do you control!
Ans: Field status variant is maintained all FSGs.
14) What are the segments of GL master record?
Ans:

COA Segment
A/C group
Nature of account
Short text
GL a/c long text
Trading partner
Group Account Number
Company code segment
Account currency
Tax
Reconciliation a/c for a/c type
OIM,LID,FSG.

15) What does Field status group assigned to a GL master record controls?
Ans: It controls the account assignments that are made to the account. Specifically the field status
group controls whether postings to cost centers, internal orders, profitability segments and so on
are required, not allowed (suppressed), or optional.
16) What is Country and operational chart of account? Why do you use group chart of
account?
Ans: Operational chart of account Day to day activities It is mandatory.
Country COA It's used for legal specific requirement of each country. It's additional and optional.
Group COA used for consolidation of Company codes. This is for group consolidation purpose.
17) What are all the segments in a Customer/Vendor master record?
Ans: Segments in Customer Segments in Vendor
- General Data segment General data segment
- Company code segment Company code segment
- Sales area segment Purchasing organization
Segment
18) What is open line item management? What do you mean by clearing open line items?
Ans: Open item management is further reconciliation function. OIM allows you to display the open
and cleared items and amounts in an account. OIM should be used if an offsetting entry is made for
every line item posted in the account. The a/c is reconciled and cleared against another account.
Ex. Salary clearing account and GR/IR Clearing account.
- 511 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

19) What is residual payment and part payment?


Ans: Residual payment it clears original invoice with incoming amount and create new line item
for remaining outstanding amount. Partial payment it leaves the original invoice amount and
creates
new line item for incoming amount.
20) What is internal and external number ranges?
Ans: Internal Number Ranges: Doc. No will be provided by the system automatically! in serial
order allotting the next available progressive number. The number must be in numerical. External
Number ranges: Doc. No will be given manually by the end user. System will not lock no
automatically in this case. User can pick the number randomly. Number may be an alpha numeric.
21.Whether any FI document will be created during PO(Purchase order)? If pl mention the
entry also?
Ans: There is no document that is created in FI side during PO. But in controlling there can be a
commitment posting to a Cost Center. The offsetting entry is posted at the time of GR.

22. What factors differentiates from one dunning level and other dunning level.
Ans: The most important thing that differentiates the dunning levels are the dunning texts. The
dunning text defines the urgency of the dunning notice. The other things can be the dunning
charges, minimum & maximum amounts etc.
23. APP There will be many banks in a house bank. If the payment should be maid from
particular bank GL account. Where it is configured?
Ans: There can be several accounts in the same house bank. We should assign the GL accounts
exclusively at the time of creating the Bank master data and the bank accounts. Accordingly we
can do the bank determination in FBZP for the individual banks and the corresponding sub
accounts. Transaction code for Defining bank : FI12.
24.What are various types of servers in SAP R/3?
Ans: The Typical SAP landscape looks something like figure 1.4 below:

25.can anybody explain me FI-MM integartion.pl explain in detail


i. Movement types:
Classification key indicating the type of material movement (for example, goods receipt,
goods issue, physical stock transfer). The movement type enables the system to find
predefined posting
rules determining how the accounts of the financial accounting
system (stock and consumption accounts) are to be posted and how the
stock fields in the material master record are to be updated.
ii. Valuation class
- 512 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
Assignment of a material to a group of G/L accounts
Along with other factors, the valuation class determines the G/L
accounts that are updated as a result of a valuation-relevant transaction or event, such as a goods
movement.
The valuation class makes it possible to:
- Post the stock values of materials of the same material type to
different G/L accounts
- Post the stock values of materials of different material types to
the same G/L account
iii. Transaction/Event Key
Key allowing the user to differentiate between the various transactions and events (such as physical
inventory transactions and goods movements) that occur within the field of inventory management.
The transaction/event type controls the filing/storage of documents and the assignment of
document numbers.
iv. Material Type
Groups together materials with the same basic attributes, for
example, raw materials, semi finished products, or finished products.
When creating a material master record, you must assign the material
to a material type. The material type you choose determines:
- Whether the material is intended for a specific purpose, for
example, as a configurable
material or process material
- Whether the material number can be assigned internally or
externally
- The number range from which the material number is drawn
- Which screens appear and in what sequence
- Which user department data you may enter
- What procurement type the material has; that is, whether it is
manufactured in-house or
procured externally, or both
Together with the plant, the material type determines the material's
inventory management requirement, that is:
- Whether changes in quantity are updated in the material master
record
- Whether changes in value are also updated in the stock accounts in
financial accounting
26.Maximum no. of dunning levels are created?
Ans: 9 levels maximum.
27.In how many ways APP is configured?
Tr Code: FBZP
28.What is diff between AAM, Recurring entries, Sample document ?
Account Assignment Model:
- 513 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
A reference for document entry that provides default values for posting business transactions. An
account assignment model can contain any number of G/L account items and can be changed or
supplemented at any time. In contrast to sample documents, the G/L account items for account
assignment models may be incomplete.
Recurring Entries:
A periodically recurring posting made by the recurring entry program on the basis of recurring
entry original documents. The procedure is comparable with a standing order by which banks are
authorized to debit rent payments, payment contributions or loan repayments.
Sample Documents:
Special type of reference document. Data from this document is used to create default entries on
the accounting document entry screen. Unlike an accounting document, a sample document does
not update transaction figures but merely serves as a data source for an accounting document.
29. Where to assign activity type in cost centers? OR how to link cost centers & activity
types?
There is no direct assignment. You plan the output for a cost center first in kp26. Then you've to
plan the value of that cost center which you budget for a period in kp06. Planned Activity
expenditure / Planned Actvty qty gives yoa planned act rate which you can use to valuate your
activity confirmations in mfg ordrs. You can also define your own prices,but you have to run the
price
revaluation if you want to revaluate your actual activity prices.
30. For stat. key figure what is the significance of sender & receiver cost elements & cost
centers?
Stat key fig are not real account assignments. In simple traditional terms it is the base to allocate or
define proportions with which the cost is allocated. SKFs are used to calculate the debit on a
receiver object. These values can be used for assessing common costs which are used by all the
other cost centers. How SKF works .. Kindly give me T Codes Also.
You create & plan SKF. Create using KK01 & PLAN the parameters of SKF in KP46

- 514 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

31: What is Software Life Cycle?


Ans: it is nothing but Road Map - five phases like, Project Preparation, Blue print, Realisation,
Final preparation and Go-livesupport.
32: In GL master we have a option "Balance in local currency" and "Account
currency".What does it mean?
Ans: Account currency is that the GL account in which currency do you want to maintain. if you
decided that you want maintain in company code currency, you can post any currency in that
account. If not, you want to maintain separate currency for that GL then exchange rate difference
will come because the conversion rate. Balance in local currency - some GL account can't be
maintain on open item basis and can't in foreign currency like clearing account and discount
account etc., in such case you can assign this indicator to show the balance in local currency.

33. In movement type(MM), what is value & quantity string I know it updates values and
quantities in GL with mix of valuvation class, transaction key modifier and GL A/c. But how
does it work when doing a mvt type?
Ans: Basically, the system does not know which GL has to be updated with what. here, we are
giving a direction to the system to update the data. What you said is correct, the system will update
the value and qty in the material master. You would have seen some more fields also, like
Movement indicator, consumption, value string and transaction event key etc.,
While creating a PO, the system will take the Movement type as a base, with MT, it will identify
the MI(movement indicator - used to define whether it is goods movement for production order,
purchase
order, delivery note etc), and it will identify the consumption,( like it is assets, or consumption or
sales order) and it will identify the value string ( it is must to assigned to movement type, through
allocation of value string to movement type, system will automatically identify the GL ) and it will
post the entry (dr/cr)in the GL based on the transaction and event key figure which is used to
determine the debit and credit entry of a GL
35. About evolution in the world of business, we can affirmate that (Please choose the correct
sentence):
a) [ ] The internet revolution could turn available to companies the use of ERP functionality.
b) [ ] The next generation of "new dimension" products appeared taking functionality out of the
company, to bring value through extending the Internet Revolution.
c) [ ] The internet has driven to a collaborative environment where value is created through
collaboration within business comunities.
d) [ ] In the first the companies were looking at Cost reduction and efficiency through integration
of business comunities.
36. About the definition of ERP and e-business functionalities, we can say that (Note: we can
have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct):
a) [ ] ERP offers enterprise centric functionality (general ledger, payroll, order entry) to integrate
core, internal processes.
b) [ ] ERP is mySAP Financials and mySAP HR.
- 515 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
c) [ ] ERP is SAP R/3, while e-business is mySAP.com.
d) [ ] About Business Model, ERP can be considered as enterprise centric and e-business, as
extended and collaborative.
e) [ ] About Architecture, ERP can be considered as an integrated system and e-business, as an
integrated system and an open integration platform.
f) [ ] About Processes, ERP can have them integrated, core within enterprises and collaborative,
beyond company boundaries.
37. What is a SAP Business Object (Please choose the correct sentence)?
a) [ ] It is all the transaction data generated via transactions.
b) [ ] It is the instancied class of the Class Builder.
c) [ ] It is composed of tables that are related in a business context, including the related
appplication programs and it is maintained in the Class Repository.
d) [ ] It is the representation of a central business object in the real world, such as an employee,
sales order, purchase requisition, invoice and so on.
e) [ ] It is a sequence of dialog steps that are consistent in a business context and that belong
together logically.
38. About BAPI (Business Application Programming Interface), what is true (Note: we can
have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)?
a) [ ] It is a well-defined interface providing access to processes and data of business application
systems.
b) [ ] BAPIs offer a stable, standardized interface for integrating third-party applications and
components in the Business Framework.
c) [ ] A BAPI is assigned to one and only one business object.
d) [ ] In the R/3 Enterprise version (4.7) we can use BAPI to create an internal order inside a
customized ABAP program.
e) [ ] A business object in the Business Object Repository (BOR) can have many methods from
which one or several are implemented as BAPIs.
39. What can we say about ALE (Application Link Enabling, Note: we can have more than
one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)?
a) [ ] Business processes cannot be distributed using ALE.
b) [ ] The ALE concept is related to an enterprise structure with areas that have central tasks and
areas with tasks that are decentralized.
c) [ ] The applications are integrated via a central database.
d) [ ] The applications are integrated via the message exchange.
e) [ ] The ALE concept supports the implementation and operation of distributed SAP applications.
40. A company code is:
a) [ ] an independent accounting entity (the smallest organization element for which a complete
self-contained set of accounts can be drawn up).
b) [ ] an organizational unit in an enterprise that represents a closed system used for cost
accounting purposes.
c) [ ] an organizational unit that provides an additional evaluation level for the purpose of segment
reporting, for example.
d) [ ] a dependent accounting entity, according to Fiscal Year.
e) [ ] the highest level in the R/3 system hierarchy.
- 516 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

41. Consider the following sentences:


41.1. The variant principle is a three-step method used in R/3 to assign special properties to
one or more R/3 objects.
41.2. One of the disadvantages to use variants is that it can't deal with the maintenance of
properties, which are common among several business objects.
41.3. For using the variant principle, you must define the variant, populate it with values and
assign it to the R/3 objects.
41.4. This principle is used for Fiscal Years, Posting Periods and so on. Which of them is
false?
a) [ ] 41.1 and 41.2.
b) [ ] 41.1 and 41.3.
c) [ ] 41.1.
d) [ ] 41.2.
e) [ ] 41.3.
42. Consider the following sentences:
42.1. A fiscal year has to be defined by means of separating business transactions into
different periods.
42.2. Special periods are used for postings, which are related to the process of the year-end
closing. In total, 16 special periods can be used.
42.3. The Fiscal Year variant only defines the amount of periods and their start and finish
dates.
42.4. The Fiscal Year is defined as a variant, which is assigned to the chart of accounts.
Which of them are true?
a) [ ] 42.1 and 42.2.
b) [ ] 42.1 and 42.3.
c) [ ] 42.2 and 42.3.
d) [ ] 42.2 and 42.4.
e) [ ] 42.3 and 42.4.
43. What is an independent fiscal year variant (Please choose the correct sentence)?
a) [ ] It is a variant which the postings periods are only equal to the months of the year.
b) [ ] It is a variant which you can define different number of periods, according to the year.
c) [ ] It is a variant which each own fiscal year uses the same number of periods, and the postings
periods always start and end at the same day of the year.
d) [ ] It is a variant which allows the use of different number of posting periods.
e) [ ] It is a variant not normally used because of its particularity.
44. Consider the following statements about currencies concepts:
44.1. The currency code identifies each currency that will be used into R/3 system.
44.2. You have to define all the world 's currency into R/3 system
44.3. Exchange rate types distinguishes the exchange rates to be considered for various
purposes, such as valuation, translation, conversion, planning, etc. Which of them is true
(Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they
are correct)?
a) [ ] 44.1.
b) [ ] 44.2.
- 517 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
c) [ ] 44.3.
d) [ ] none of them.
e) [ ] all of them.

I.G.REDDY

- 518 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
45. Consider the following sentences:
45.1. A base currency can be assigned to an exchange rate type.
45.2. To deal with exchange rate spreads, two very efficient combinations of the exchange
rate tools are using a base currency for the average rate (M) and using the exchange rate
spreads to calculate the buying and selling rates (B and G).
45.3. A base currency can be used for an average, a buying or a selling rate.
45.4. The relations between currencies have to be maintained per exchange rate type and
currency pair in the translation factors. Which of these combinations is true?
a) [ ] 45.1, 45.3 and 45.4.
b) [ ] 45.1, 45.2 and 45.4.
c) [ ] 45.2, 45.3 and 45.4.
d) [ ] 45.1, 45.2 and 45.3.
e) [ ] 45.1, 45.2, 45.3 and45.4.
46. Consider the following sentences about the direct quotation:
46.1. It is also known as price notation.
46.2. The currency value is expressed in units of the foreign currency per unit of local
currency.
46.3. For direct quotation, the prefix to indicate the rate is "/". What is the correct
option?
a) [ ] 46.1.
b) [ ] 46.2.
c) [ ] 46.3.
d) [ ] none of them.
e) [ ] all of them.
47. Consider the following sentences about the indirect quotation:
47.1. It is also known as volume notation.
47.2. The currency value is expressed in the local currency per unit of foreign currency.
47.3. For indirect quotation, there is no prefix to difference between direct quotation. What is
the correct option?
a) [ ] all of them.
b) [ ] none of them.
c) [ ] 47.3.
d) [ ] 47.2.
e) [ ] 47.1.
48. What of these alternatives are considered master data (Note: we can have more than one
correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)?
a) [ ] Chart of Accounts.
b) [ ] G/L Accounts.
c) [ ] Vendor.
d) [ ] Customer.
e) [ ] Asset.

- 519 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

49. What can we define into the chart of accounts customizing transaction (OB13 transaction,
Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they
are correct)?
a) [ ] Description.
b) [ ] Maintenance language.
c) [ ] Length of the company code.
d) [ ] Length of the G/L account number.
e) [ ] Blocking / unblocking chart of accounts.

50. Consider the following sentences about the chart of accounts segment:
50.1. It contains the Company Code, Account number and the field status group.
50.2. Whenever you need to enter information for a company code for an account number,
you have to type again the information related to chart of accounts segment.
50.3. Texts can be
manual"(RFSKTH00).

displayed

using

the

program

"Account

assignment

50.4. Key words facilitate the search for account numbers. Which of these combinations are
false (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think
they are correct)?
a) [ ] 50.1.
b) [ ] 50.2.
c) [ ] 50.3.
d) [ ] 50.4.
e) [ ] none of them.
51. True or false?
51.1. Every company code that needs to use an account from the assigned chart of accounts
has to create its own company code segment.
a) [ ] True b) [ ] False
51.2. For P+L statement accounts, the balance is carried forward to the same account.
a) [ ] True b) [ ] False
51.3. In the chart of accounts segment, it is necessary to indicate whether the account will be
a balance sheet or a profit+loss statement account.
a) [ ] True b) [ ] False
51.4. Number intervals for G/L account master records can overlap.
a) [ ] True b) [ ] False
- 520 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
51.5. It is not possible to influence the appearance of an account's master data.
a) [ ] True b) [ ] False
52. Consider the following sentences about field status:
52.1. Fields which are _____________ can be ____________.
52.2. Fields which have an entry that ________________ can be set to _________ only (even
in change mode). Which of the options below matches the blank spaces of those sentences?
a) [ ] used/suppressed for 18.1; must be changed/display for 18.2.
b) [ ] not used/suppressed for 18.1; must be changed/display for 18.2.
c) [ ] not used/optional for 18.1; should not be changed/suppressed for 18.2.
d) [ ] not used/suppressed for 18.1; should not be changed /display for 18.2.
e) [ ] used/optional for 18.1; must be changed/display for 18.2.

53. Consider the following sentences about field status:


53.1. Fields which _____________ can be made ____________.
53.2. Fields that can be entered, but are not required, can be set to _________ entry. Which
of the options below matches the blank spaces of those sentences?
a) [ ] must not have an entry/optional for 53.1; suppresed for 53.2.
b) [ ] must have an entry/supressed for 53.1; suppresed for 53.2.
c) [ ] must have an entry/optional for 53.1; optional for 53.2.
d) [ ] must have an entry/required for 53.1; optional for 53.2.
e) [ ] must not have an entry/required for 53.1; optional for 53.2.
54. Consider the following sentences:
54.1. Reconciliation accounts are general ledger accounts assigned to the business partner
master records to record all transactions in the sub-ledger.
54.2. For accounts without line item display, the most important data from the posted line
items is stored in a special index table.
54.3. The account currency must be in the local currency.
54.4. Items in accounts with open item management means the G/L accounts should have a
offsetting posting for a given business transaction. Which of these are true (Please choose the
correct sentence)?
a) [ ] 54.1 and 54.3.
b) [ ] 54.2 and 54.4.
c) [ ] 54.1 and 54.2.
d) [ ] 54.2 and 54.3.
e) [ ] 54.1 and 54.4.

- 521 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
Answers:

I.G.REDDY

34. C
35. A, C, D, E.
36. D
37. A, B, C, D, E.
38. B, D, E.
39. A
Item "B" is the definition of controlling area.
Item "C" is the definition of business area.
Item "D" is not any definition.
Item "E" is the definition of client.
40. D
In fact, the main advantage of using variants is that it is easier to maintain properties, which
are common among several business objects.
41. B
42. C
43. A, C.
Most of the world's currencies are already defined into R/3 system.
44. B
Be careful: A base currency can only be used for an average rate, not for a selling or a buying
rate.
45. A
46. E
47. B, C, D, E.
A chart of accounts is a variant, which contains the structure and the basic information
about general ledger accounts.
48. A, B, D, E.
49. A, B.
50. True or false:
51.1. True.
- 522 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

51.2. False. For P+L statement accounts the balance is carried forward to a retained earnings
account and the P+L statement account is set to zero.
51.3. True.
51.4. True.
51.5. False. It is possible to influence the appearance of an account's master data using the
field status.
52. D
53. D
54. E
55. Since the line item display takes up additional system resources, you should only use it if
there is no other way of looking at the line items. So, you should not activate the line item
display for the following accounts (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please
select the sentences you think they are correct):
a) [ ] P+L Statement.
b) [ ] Reconciliation.
c) [ ] Revenue.
d) [ ] Material Stock.
e) [ ] Tax.
Questions
56. Consider the following statements:
56.1. Accounts with open item management must have line item display activated.
56.2. You can activate or deactivate open item management everytime, even if the account
hasn't a zero balance.
56.3. You can select both local and foreign currencies as account currency.
56.4. If the account is the local currency, the account can only be
posted to this currency.
56.5. When using the "Only Balances in Local Currency" indicator in the master data
record, transaction figures are only managed for amounts translated into local currency.
Which of the above statements are true (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence.
Please select the sentences you think they are correct)?
a) [ ] 56.1.
b) [ ] 56.2.
c) [ ] 56.3.
d) [ ] 56.4.
e) [ ] 56.5.
57. True or false?
57.1. The "Only Balances in Local Currency" indicator must not be set in reconciliation
accounts for customers or vendors.
- 523 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False.
57.2. The "Only Balances in Local Currency" indicator is usually set in balance sheet
accounts that are not managed in foreign currencies and not managed on an open item basis.
a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False.
57.3. Accounts with a foreign currency as an account currency can be posted to any currency.
a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False.
57.4. You can use a group chart of accounts for internal purposes.
a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False.
57.5. The usage of a financial statement version for the group chart of accounts is optional.
a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False.
58. What is the disadvantage of using the group chart of accounts (Please choose the correct
sentence)?
a) [ ] Because changes to existing G/L Accounts are effective as soon as they have been saved
and could have extensive consequences.
b) [ ] Because accounts with the account currency as local currency can only be posted to this
local currency.
c) [ ] Because the company codes use different operational chart of accounts, you cannot
carry out cross-company code controlling.
d) [ ] Because the group chart of accounts must be assigned to each operational chart of
accounts.
e) [ ] Because you must enter the group account number in the chart of acounts segment of
the operational account.
59. Consider the following statements:
59.1. You cannot use the country chart of accounts if you desire to use the cross-company
code controlling.
59.2. The disadvantage of using country chart of accounts is the accounting clerks who may
be familiar with the country chart of accounts first have to get used to using the operational
chart of
accounts.
59.3. Reconciliation accounts are updated on a daily basis. Which of them are false (Please
choose the correct sentence)?
a) [ ] 59.1 and 59.2.
b) [ ] 59.1 and 59.3.
c) [ ] 59.2 and 59.3.
d) [ ] all of them.
e) [ ] none of them.
60. Which are the segments of the SD view of the customer account master data (Note: we
can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are
correct)?
- 524 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

a) [ ] Client.
b) [ ] Company Code.
c) [ ] Controlling Area.
d) [ ] Sales Area.
e) [ ] Purchasing Organization.

61. Which are the segments of the MM view of the customer account master data (Note: we
can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are
correct)?
a) [ ] Client.
b) [ ] Company Code.
c) [ ] Controlling Area.
d) [ ] Sales Area.
e) [ ] Purchasing Organization.

62. What is the segment that makes complete both customer and vendor accounts (Please
choose the correct sentence)?
a) [ ] Client.
b) [ ] Company Code.
c) [ ] Controlling Area.
d) [ ] Sales Area.
e) [ ] Purchasing Organization.
63. What characteristics are configured as standard for every customer/vendor account
(Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they
are correct)?
a) [ ] Line Item Display.
b) [ ] Company Code.
c) [ ] Currency.
d) [ ] Open Item Management.
e) [ ] Purchasing Organization.
64. Consider the following statements:
64.1. Number ranges for customer/vendor accounts can overlap.
64.2. An one-time account is a special customer/vendor master record which a company
rarely do business.
64.3. The account group is used to control the fields displayed in the master record.
64.4. If you enter an alternative payer, the amount to clear the open items due in the account
is paid by the alternative payer.
64.5. One number range can only be assigned to one account group. Which of the above
statements are true (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the
sentences you think they are correct)?
a) [ ] 64.1.
b) [ ] 64.2.
c) [ ] 64.3.
- 525 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
d) [ ] 64.4.
e) [ ] 64.5.

I.G.REDDY

65. True or false?


65.1. For every bank that is used in the system (for example, as a house bank or as a
customer/vendor bank) you have to create a bank master record.
a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False.
65.2. Banks that are used by your company are defined as house banks.
a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False.
65.3. You cannot create bank master data when entering bank information in the customer
or vendor master record.
a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False.
65.4. Bank Account and G/L Account are the same master data object.
a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False.
65.5. Customers that use the lockbox function can create a batch input session that
automatically updates customer banking information in the master record.
a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False.
66. Consider the following statements:
66.1. The system can assign the document numbers or the user can assign the number during
document entry.
66.1. A business transaction creates only one document.
66.3. Document types are defined at company code level.
66.4. Number ranges for document numbers and account types defined for postings are
defined by the document types.
66.5. Document types also define whether invoices are posted with the net procedure.
Choose the correct option:
a) [ ] 66.1, 66.4 and 66.5 are correct.
b) [ ] 66.2, 66.4 and 66.5 are correct.
c) [ ] 66.3, 66.4 and 66.5 are correct.
d) [ ] 66.1, 66.3 and 66.4 are correct.
e) [ ] 66.1, 66.2 and 66.5 are correct.
67. What do the posting keys specify (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence.
Please select the sentences you think they are correct)?
a) [ ] Whether the line item is connected to a payment transaction or not.
b) [ ] Whether the posting is sales-relevant and the sales figure of the account is to be updated
by the transaction, for example, by the posting of a customer invoice.
c) [ ] Whether the line items contain "credit" or "debit" values.
d) [ ] Whether the line items are valid for a business transaction.
e) [ ] Whether the accounts are allowed for posting.
- 526 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
68. Consider the following statements:

I.G.REDDY

68.1. A company code must be assigned to a posting period variant to have the control for
posting periods.
68.2.`+' symbol represents all account types in the posting period customizing screen.
68.3. The account interval in the posting period customizing screen can be both G/L and
subledger accounts.
68.4. The maximum amounts are defined per company code in "tolerance groups".
68.5. It is not possible to assign tolerance groups to user logon ID's.
Choose the correct option:
a) [ ] 68.1, 68.4 and 68.5 are correct.
b) [ ] 68.2, 68.4 and 68.5 are correct.
c) [ ] 68.3, 68.4 and 68.5 are correct.
d) [ ] 68.1, 68.2 and 68.4 are correct.
e) [ ] 14.1, 68.2 and 68.5 are correct.
69. What fields of a FI Document Header section can be changed after a document has
already been posted (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the
sentences you think they are correct)?
a) [ ] Fiscal Year.
b) [ ] Reference Number.
c) [ ] Text fields.
d) [ ] Header text.
e) [ ] Posting date.
70. About the change control, what conditions below are applicable (Note: we can have more
than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)?
70.1. The posting period is already closed.
70.2. The line item is not yet cleared.
70.3. The document is a credit memo for an invoice.
70.4. The document is not a credit memo from a down payment.
70.5. The line item is either a debit in a customer account or a
credit in a vendor account.
a) [ ] 70.1.
b) [ ] 70.2.
c) [ ] 70.3.
d) [ ] 70.4.
e) [ ] 70.5.
71. What are the prerequisites to enable negative postings (Note: we can have more than one
correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)?
a) [ ] You have to define reversal reasons for negative reversal.
b) [ ] You have to ensure company code permits negative postings.
c) [ ] You have to define the document type that explicitly allows negative postings.
d) [ ] You have to use cleared items.
e) [ ] You have to reset cleared items.
- 527 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
72. What is the purpose of the terms of payment (Please choose the correct sentence)?
a) [ ] Calculate a cash discount and invoice due date.
b) [ ] Calculate the tax amounts.
c) [ ] Enable the cross-company code transactions.
d) [ ] Define the baseline date.
e) [ ] Calculate only the required conditions for SD invoices.
73. Consider the following statements:
73.1. Terms of payments are copied from invoice to credit memos when they are linked to.
73.2. Inserting a "V" in the invoice reference field during document entry means the
terms of payment are activated in the non-invoice-related credit memos.
73.3. The account type field in terms of payment basic data screen should be defined
separately, to prevent any done change in the term of payment.
73.4. The system cannot define the splitment of an installment payment, at least you define it
in the terms of payment.
73.5. The day limits define the dates of the cash discount periods. Which of the statements
above is false (Please choose the correct sentence)?
a) [ ] 73.1.
b) [ ] 73.2.
c) [ ] 73.3.
d) [ ] 73.4.
e) [ ] 73.5.
74. True or false?
74.1. SAP supports tax on sales and purchases, US sales tax, additional taxes and withholding
tax as tax systems for different countries.
a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False.
74.2. Only national level of taxation is allowed in the R/3 system.
a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False.
74.3. A tax calculation procedure is assigned to every company code for carrying out tax
calculations.
a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False.
74.4.A jurisdiction code is a combination of the codes of tax authorities that tax movements
of goods and use their own tax rates.
a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False.
74.5. If you desire to post manual tax postings, you have to flag
the "Post Automatically Only" field of the account master record.
a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False.
Answers:
- 528 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

55. B, C, D, E.
56. A, C, E.
57. True or false:
57.1. True.
57.2. True.
57.3. False. Accounts with a foreign currency as an account currency can only be posted to in
this foreign currency.
57.4. True.
57.5. False. You must use a financial statement version for the group chart of accounts.
58. C.
Item "a" is related to Collective Processing for G;L Accounts Master Data. Item "b" is not
true for the R/3 system concept. If the account currency is the local currency, the account can
be posted to in any currency. Item "d" and "e" are some actions to be done for using group
chart of accounts, so, they are not the disadvantage.
59. B.
In fact, since all company codes use the same operational chart of accounts for postings, you
can carry out cross-company code controlling. About Reconciliation accounts, they are
updated
realtime.
60. A, D.
61. A, E.
62. B.
63. A, D.
64. B, C, D.
NOTE: A number range can be assigned to several account groups.
65. True or false?
65.1. True.
65.2. True.
65.3. False. In fact, we can create bank master data when entering bank information in the
customer or vendor master record.

- 529 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
65.4. False. Each bank account is reflected in the SAP System by a combination of house
bank ID and account ID. This combination is entered in a G/L account that represents the
bank accounting the
general ledger.
65.5. True.
66. A.
67. A, B, C, E.
68. D.
69. B, C.
70. B, D, E.
71. A, B, C.
72. A.
73. E.
The day limits are used to store several versions of terms of payment under the same terms of
payment key.
74. True or false:
74.1. True.
74.2. False. Two types of taxation can be represented in the R/3 system: taxation at national
level and taxation at regional/jurisdiction level.
74.3. False. A tax calculation procedure is assigned to every country for carrying out tax
calculations.
74.4. True
74.5. False. If you have selected this field, no manual tax postings are allowed.
75. There is "company" field in the Company Code global settings. The R/3 help says that it
is being used for consolidation. We can use Group Chart of account to do the same. What is
the significance of this field.
76. When we copy the COA, only one Fin Stat Version is being copied. A COA can have
many Fin Stat Version. Why copying of COA allows only one Fin St Ver?
77. What are the information that are not copied to new company code when we copy
company code?
78. Whether one group chart of account can be assigned to 2 Operational charts. For Eg.
INTA and INTB is being used by group of company as OCA. Whether GCA GRP can be
assigned to INTA and INTB?
- 530 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

75A). Company is an organizational unit which is generally used in the legal consolidation to roll
up financial statements of several company codes. A company can include one or more company
codes. If
we are going for Consolidation , we need to enter the 6 character alphanumeric company identifier
that relates to this company code. Company Codes within a Company must use the same chart of
accounts and fiscal year. And for consolidation purpose we use Group COA wherein we link the
Operating COA thru entering the GL account no. of the Group COA in the GL Account of the
Operating COA.
76A). A financial statement version corresponds to the chart of accounts and wherein Individual
(operational) accounts are assigned to the corresponding FS item on the lowest level of this
version.
But as for the rollup of Accounts is not possible in all the FSV which can be copied, n rather can
update manually n create multiple FSVs if necessary depending on the Financial Statements which
are necessary for the Organisation.
77A). All the Organizational units (Global Data) for a company code will b copied to new
company code upon using the copy function except for the transactional data.
78A). Yes, Group COA can be assigned i.e., the GL A/c.No. is linked to the GL Accounts of the
both Operating COA . That means Group COA consists of Unique set of Accounts which can be
linked to Op.COA 1 and Op.COA 2.
Ans: Q.No.75. In the SAP system, consolidation functions in financial accounting are based on
companies. A company can comprise one or more company codes. for example: Company A have
4 company codes which is existing in different state and / or country. When Company A wants to
consolidated the accounts, it will give the common list of accounts which in turn called group chart
of
accounts. Group chart of account is used to define/ list the GL account uniformly for all company
codes.
Ans: Q.No.76. In SAP R/3 system, will allow only one financial statement version for single COA
which you need to assign the same while copying the COA. T.code OBY7
Ans: Q.No.77. When you want to create FYV, PPV, COA etc for new company code which is as
same as existing company code, then you can copy all the information from the source company
code to the target company else whatever is required as per the new company code requirement
you can only copy the same, rest you can create as per the requirement. for example Fiscal year for
new company code may be shortented fiscal year which is differ from the existing company code.
In this case, fiscal year for new company code you have to create and assign it to company code.
Ans: Q.No.78. Operational chart of accounts is something differ from the Group chart of accounts
but Group chart of account can be assigned to Operating chart of account 1 and 2 through GL
account no. Operating chart of accounts: The operating chart of accounts contains the GL accounts
that you use for posting in your company code during daily activities. Financial accounting and
controlling both use this chart of accounts. You have to assign an operating chart of account to a
company code. Group chart of accounts: The group chart of accounts contains the GL accounts that
are used by the entire corporate group. This allows the company to provide reports for the entire
corporate group.

- 531 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

79.How do we know which target cost version we are using?


To find out which version is used for your Target Cost, try this
menu path
IMG > Controlling -> Product Cost Controlling -> Cost Object Controlling -> Product Cost by
Order -> Period-end Closing -> Variance Calculation -> Define Target Cost Versions (tcode
OKV6).
80.How do you change the "Input tax code - Assets without input tax" value for a company
in Asset Accounting? Technically, how do you change field MWSKZVA field in table T093C?
TIA.
You can used transaction 'OBCL'. Via customizing: Asset accounting -> Integration with general
ledger -> Assign input tax indicator for non-taxable acquisitions Require GR & IV report
81.Is there any report on GR pending for IV?
You could try executing program RFWERE00, without postings. This is the same program which
is used for period end closing- regrouping of GR/IR...but for only a report do not create postings.
or
May be transaction MB5S can help you out.
Retained Profit Account
82.After we run the GL balance carry forward, you only manage to know the balance carry forward
for the retained profit account but you don't how much is actually post to the particular account.
You
have try almost all of the standard report but still can't find any report that can show you the figure.
The balance carried forward is only a 'calculated' figure and not a 'posted' figure. The break-up of
the retained earnings figure is available when you run the balance carried forward report. You can
also derive the balance by selecting only the P&L Accounts for the relevant period. The net
balance of these accounts should equal the retained earnings account.
ACH payment configuration
83.Based on 4.0B. Is it possible to configure the system for ACH payments or do we need to
upgrade?
You can use RFFOUS_T to produce an ACH file. You may have to use user exits to write header
and trailer records. Please read documentation on this program and it is self-explanatory.
Locking of Planning Data in Profit Center Accounting
84.How to lock planning data in profit center accounting. In 4.6 b the transaction is
S_ALR_87004395 - Maintain Versions you can lock versions for each fiscal year

Changes in vendor master


- 532 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

85.Is there a report which shows changes in vendor master data. Not only for one like MK04 or
XK04 but for a range like all changes in vendors per ccode. (should be similar to customer master
transdaction OV51) You can used report "RFKABL00". In the accounts payable reporting menu
this program can be found via:
Accounts payable -> Adequacy and documentation -> Master data -> Display of vendor changes
(depending on your SAP version of course)
Bank Statement Upload
86.How to used the program RFEBKATX? This creates two files STATE.TXT and
ITEM.TXT.
How are these files imported into SAP?
Try using program RFEBKA00 to upload the two files.
- one is the header file containing the House bank & account information along with the date and
the statement number
- the other is the item details.
87.What is the difference between company and company code?
A company is the organizational unit used in the legal consolidation module to roll up financial
statements of several company codes. The Company Code is the smallest organizational ! unit for
which a complete self-contained set of accounts can be drawn up for purposes of external
reporting.
88.How many chart of accounts can be attached to a company code?
One or more Operative Chart of Accounts can be assigned to a company code. A COA must be
aasigned to a company code. This COA is the operative COA and is used in both FI and CO. One
Chart of Account can be assigned to many Company codes i.e., Multiple company codes can either
share the same or have separate COA. But a company code (Country specific Company code or
International Company code) can have a country specific COA also along with Operative COA.
The link between the regular COA and the country COA appears in the alternate number field of
the G/L master record. Eg: If a company's subdidiaries are located in both US & Mexico. We need
to configure 2 Company codes - one for US and another for Mexico,for eg U100 and M100. The
same way we create 2 COA's one for US & one for Mexico, USCA and MXCA. Mexico has
different govt
reporting requirements than the US so we will need to define a company code specific to Country
Mexico and also create a country specific COA to be used, in addition to normal COA. In tcode
OBY6
(Comp Code Global Parameters) of CC M100 we define normal COA i.e.,USCA in Chart of
Accounts field and MXCA in Country Chart/Accts field.
89.What are substitutions and validations? What is the precedent?
Validations are used to check settings and return a message if the prerequisite check condition is
met.
Substitutions are similar to validations; they actually replace and fill in field values behind the
scenes without the user's knowledge unlike validations that create on-screen msgs to the user.
90.What is a controlling area?

- 533 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
The Controlling Area is the central organizational unit within CO module. It is representative of a
contained Cost Accounting envt where costs and revenues can be managed.
91.Define relationship between controlling area and company code?
A controlling area may include one or more company codes which must use the same operative
chart of accounts as the controlling area. A Controlling Area can contain multiple company code
assignments but a single company code can be assigned to only one controlling area.
92.What is a fiscal year variant?
Fiscal Year is a period of 12 months and SAP provides 4 special periods to posting adjustment
Entries. Fiscal year determines posting periods. Posting periods are used to assign business
transactions. Fiscal year may be year dependent or year independent.
93.What are special periods used for?
The Special periods in a fiscal year variant can be used for things like posting audit or tax
adjustments to a closed fiscal year.
94.What do you mean by year dependent in fiscal year variants?
Year Dependent: the financial year is same as calendar year. Starting from 1st Jan to 31st Dec
(where posting periods and the calendar months are equal) Year Independent: the financial year is
different from calendar year Starting from 1st April to 31st March (where the posting period
months are not equal to calendar year months)
95.What are shortened fiscal year? When are they used?
Shortened Fiscal Year: a financial year, which has less than 12 periods.
96.What are posting periods?
The Posting period variant controls which posting periods, both normal and special, are open for
each company code. It is possible to have a different posting period variant for each company code
in
the organization. The posting period is independent of the fiscal year variant.
97.What are document types and what are they used for?
Document type is the identifier of differentt account transactions like SA for G/L,AA for Asset
Accounting etc.The doc. Types controls things like type of the account that can be posted to, the
number range assigned to it, and required doc header fields.
98.How are tolerance group for employees used?
Tolerance group stores Posting amount defaults. Tolerance groups are assigned to User ID's that
ensures only authorized persons can make postings.
99.What are posting keys? State the purpose of defining posting keys?

- 534 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


I.G.REDDY
Version ECC 6.0
Posting keys determine whether a line item entry is a debit or a credit as well as the possible field
status for the transaction. Posting keys are SAP delivered. If u want changes like making additional
fields optional on payment type posting keys then the best possible action is to copy the posting
key that needs to be modified and then modify it.
100.What are field status groups?
Field status groups control the additional account assignments and other fields that can be posted at
the line item level for a G/L account.

- 535 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 536 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 537 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

General settings
Countries
T005
Currency
TCURC
TCURR
TCURT
TCURX

Countries
Currency codes
Wisselkoersen
Currency name
Decimal places for currencies.

Unit of measure
T006

Units of measure

Calendar functions
T247
TFACD
T015M
TTZZ
TTZD
TTZDF
TTZDV
TTZDT
TTZ5
TTZ5S

Month names
Factory calendar definition
Month names
Time zones
Summer time rules
Summer time rules (fixed annual dates)
Summer time rules (variable dates)
Summer time rules texts
Assign Time Tones to Countries
Assign time zones to regions

Enterprise structure
Definition
FI T880
T001
CO TKA01
LO T001W
T499S
TSPA
SD TVKO
TVTW
TVBUR
TVKBT
TVKGR
TVGRT
T171T
MM
T001L
T024E
T3001
TVST
TVLA
TTDS

Company
Company code
Controlling area
Plant / sales organization
Locations
Division
Sales organization / company code
Distribution channel
Sales office
Sales office text
Sales group
Sales group text
Sales district text
Storage locations
Purchasing organization
Warehouse number
Shipping point
Loading point
Transportation

Assignment
CO TKA02
LO T001K

Assign company code to controlling area


Assign plant (valuation area) to company code

- 538 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
SD TVKO
TVKOV
TVKOS
TVTA
TVKBZ
TVBVK
TVKWZ
MM
T024E
T024W
T001K
TVSWZ
T320

I.G.REDDY
Sales organization / company code
Distribution channel / sales organization
Division to sales organization
Sales aria
Sales office to sales area
Sales group to sales office
Plants to sales organization
Purchasing organization / company code
Plant to Purchase organization
Link plant ( = valuation area) / company code
Shipping point to plant
Assignment MM Storage Location to WM Warehouse

Financial accounting
Company code
T004
T077S
T009
T880
T014

Chart of accounts
Account group (g/l accounts)
Fiscal year variants
Global company data
Credit control area

Fi document
T010O
T010P
T001B
T003
T012

Posting period variant


Posting Period Variant Names
Permitted Posting Periods
Document types
House banks

Not categorized
T007a
T134
T179
T179T
TJ02T
TINC
TVFK
T390

Tax keys
Material types
Materials: Product Hierarchies
Materials: Product hierarchies: Texts
Status text
Customer incoterms
Billing doc types
PM: Shop papers for print control

Material master :
MARA
MAKT
MARC
MVKE
MARD
MSKA
MSPR
MARM
MEAN
PGMI
PROP
MAPR
MBEW

Material master
Material text
Material per plant / stock
Material master, sales data
Storage location / stock
Sales order stock
Project stock
Units of measure
International article number
Planning material
Forecast parameters
Link MARC <=> PROP
Material valuation
- 539 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
MVER
MLGN
MLGT
MPRP
MDTB
MDKP
MLAN
MTQSS

I.G.REDDY
Material consumption
Material / Warehouse number
Material / Storage type
Forecast profiles
MRP table
Header data for MRP document
Tax data material master
Material master view: QM

Basic data text (sap script)


STXB
SAPscript: Texts in non-SAPscript format
STXH
STXD SAPscript text file header
STXL
STXD SAPscript text file lines
Batches
MCHA
MCH1
MCHB

Batches
Batches
Stock : batches

Customer master data


KNA1
KNB1
KNVV
KNBK
KNVH
KNVP
KNVS
KNVK
KNVI

Customer master
Customer / company
Customer sales data
Bank details
Customer hierarchy
Customer partners
Shipment data for customer
Contact persons
Customer master tax indicator

Vendor
LFA1
LFB1
LFB5
LFM1
LFM2
LFBK

Vendor master
Vendor per company code
Vendor dunning data
Purchasing organisation data
Purchasing data
Bank details

Customer material info record


KNMT
Customer material info record
Bank data
BNKA

Master bank data

Master data
SKA1
BNKA

Accounts
Bank master record

Accounting documents // indices


BKPF
Accounting documents
BSEG
item level
- 540 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
BSID
BSIK
BSIM
BSIP
BSIS
BSAD
BSAK
BSAS

I.G.REDDY
Accounting: Secondary index for customers
Accounting: Secondary index for vendors
Secondary Index, Documents for Material
Index for vendor validation of double documents
Accounting: Secondary index for G/L accounts
Accounting: Index for customers (cleared items)
Accounting: Index for vendors (cleared items)
Accounting: Index for G/L accounts (cleared items)

Payment run
REGUH
REGUP

Settlement data from payment program


Processed items from payment program

CO :
TKA01
TKA02
KEKO
KEPH
KALO
KANZ

Controlling areas
Controlling area assignment
Product-costing header
Cost components for cost of goods manuf.
Costing objects
Sales order items - costing objects

Cost center master data


CSKS
CSKT
CRCO

Cost Center Master Data


Cost center texts
Assignment of Work Center to Cost Center

Cost center accounting


COSP
COEP
.
COBK
COST

CO Object: Cost Totals for External Postings


CO Object: Line Items (by Period)
CO Object: Document header
CO Object: Price Totals

Sales and Distribution (SD) :

VBFA
VTFA

Document flow (alg.)


Flow shipping documents

Sales order :
VBAK
VBAP
VBPA
VBKD
VBEP

Header data
Item data
Partners in sales order
Sales district data
Data related to line items, delivery lines

Billing document :
VBRK
VBRP

header data
Item data

Shipping :
VTTK
VTTP
VTTS

Shipment header
Shipment item
Stage in transport
- 541 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0
VTSP
VTPA
VEKP
VEPO

Stage in transport per shipment item


Shipment partners
Handling Unit - Header Table
Packing: Handling Unit Item (Contents)

Delivery :
LIKP
LIPS

Delivery header
Delivery item

Pricing :
KONH
KONP
KONV
KOND
contracts :
VEDA

I.G.REDDY

Conditions header
Conditions items
Procedure ( billing doc or sales order)

Contract data

Material Management (MM) :


Material document
MKPF
MSEG

material document
material document (item level)

Purchasing
EKKO
EKPO
EKPV
EKET
VETVG
EKES
EKKN
EKAN
EKPA
EIPO
EINA
EINE
EORD
EBAN
EBKN

Purchase document
Purchase document (item level)
Shipping-Specific Data on Stock Tfr. for Purch. Doc. Item
Delivery schedule
Delivery Due Index for Stock Transfer
Order Acceptance/Fulfillment Confirmations
Account assignment in purchasing
Vendor address purchasing
Partner functions
Item export / import data
Purchase info record (main data)
Purchase info record (organisational data)
Source list
Purchase requisition
Purchase Requisition Account Assignment

- 542 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 543 -

SAP FI/CO FI Material


Version ECC 6.0

I.G.REDDY

- 544 -

You might also like